‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‬‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪.1‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬‫‪.2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪.3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪.4‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪.5‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪.6‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪.7‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬‫‪.8‬‬‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫‪.9‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪ .10‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪ .11‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫‪ .12‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫‪ .13‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪ .14‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪ .15‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫ﺷﻛﺭًﺍ ﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷ ﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻗ ﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺄﻓﺿﻝ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻭﻋﻣﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻭﺻﻳﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﻋﺗﻳﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏ ﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣ ﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻧﻅﺭًﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ ‪.Olympus‬‬.‫ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺭﻳﻛﺎ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬

Information for Your Safety

IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONSWhen using your photographic equipment, basic safety precautions should always befollowed, including the following:• Read and understand all instructions before using.
• Close supervision is necessary when any flash is used by or near children. Do not leave
flash unattended while in use.
• Care must be taken as burns can occur from touching hot parts.
• Do not operate if the flash has been dropped or damaged - until it has been examined byqualified service personnel.
• Let flash cool completely before putting away.
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not immerse this flash in water or other liquids.
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this flash, but take it to qualified
service personnel when service or repair work is required. Incorrect reassembly cancause electric shock when the flash is used subsequently.
• The use of an accessory attachment not recommended by the manufacturer may cause arisk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬.‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬‫ ﺗﺣﺫﺭ‬.‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬.‫ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺟﻧﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬y.‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬.‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﺳﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬$!

.‫ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺟﻌﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‬

v

AR 2

‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ‪9 ...................‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‪10 .....................................‬‬‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪12 ..........................‬‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪13 ........................‬‬‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪14 ............................‬‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪15 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪16 .............................................‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪17 ...............................‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪18 ..............................‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪19 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪20 ............................................‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪20 ............................‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪22 ..................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪23 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪23 .................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪24 ...................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪25‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪25 ............................................‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪25 ............................‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪26 ..................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪27 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪27 ...........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪27 .....‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪28 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ‪28 .......................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪30 ..........................‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪31‬‬‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪31 ............‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‪31 ................‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪32 ..........................‬‬‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪32 .................................‬‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪32 ................................‬‬‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪32 ..................................‬‬‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪33 ...................................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ )‪Erase Selected/0/‬‬‫‪33 ............. (Share Order Selected‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪34 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪34 .........................‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪35‬‬‫ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪35 ...............‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ‪35 ...................................‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪36 .........................................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪37 .......................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪38 .........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ "ﺻﻮّﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ"‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪38 ...........................(P‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪39 .............................................(A‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫‪40 ............................................. (S‬‬‫‪3 AR‬‬‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪41 .................................... (M‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪42 ..................(n‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬‫]‪42 ............................[Movie Effect‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ‪44 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ‪46 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪48 ..............PHOTO STORY‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪51 ...............‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ( ‪51 .......................................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‪51 ..........................................‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ )‪51 ....... (AE Lock‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪52 .............‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )‪54 ............(AF Area‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪54 ...................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺣﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ‪55 ..........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪56 ..........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪57 ...‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ‪58 .........‬‬‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪59 ................................. ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )‪60 ............(Color Creator‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ‪60 .........................................‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪62 ..........‬‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪62 ...............‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪62 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪63‬‬‫ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫)‪64 ........................... (Share Order‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪65 ..................‬‬‫‪AR 4‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪68‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ‪68 ........‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪70 ...........‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪71 ......................‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪71 ...........‬‬‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( ‪72 ..............‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪73 ......................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ(‪74 ........................................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪75 .......................‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪76 .....................‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬‫‪77‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪77 .........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪/Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪78 ........................ Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )‪78 ..............(Card Setup‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬‫)‪79 ........................... (Reset/Myset‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ )‪80 ...... (Picture Mode‬‬‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪81 .........................(K‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪81 ............. (j/Y‬‬‫ﺗﻧﻭﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ( ‪82 .............‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ( ‪84 ..........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء( ‪85 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ‪86 ......................‬‬‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬‫)‪86 ............. (Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪88 ....................‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻠﺗﻔﺔ )‪88 ..................(R‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪88 ..........................‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺎﺕ ‪90 ..........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‬‫)‪90 .... (Connection to Smartphone‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪91 ............................‬‬‫‪) X‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ(‪91 ....................‬‬‫‪) W‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ‪91 ....................‬‬‫‪) i‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪91 ..................‬‬‫‪91 .................................. Rec View‬‬‫‪91 ........................... Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪91 ..................c/# Menu Display‬‬‫‪91 .................................. Firmware‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬‫)‪92 .........................(Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪93 .......................‬‬‫‪93 .................................. R AF/MF‬‬‫‪94 ................. S Button/Dial/Lever‬‬‫‪94 ......................... T Release/j‬‬‫‪95 ..........................U Disp/8/PC‬‬‫‪96 ......................... V Exp/p/ISO‬‬‫‪97 ............................W # Custom‬‬‫‪98 .......................X K/Color/WB‬‬‫‪99 .......................Y Record/Erase‬‬‫‪100 ................................. Z Movie‬‬‫‪100 ........................b Built-In EVF‬‬‫‪101 ............................k K Utility‬‬‫‪102 ................................. AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪102 ................................MF Assist‬‬‫‪103 ...................... Button Function‬‬‫‪105 ................ t Lever Function‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ‪112 ...................‬‬‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ ‪112 ...........‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪113 ..... OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪A OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪114 ......................................Share‬‬‫‪B OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪115 ..................................... Album‬‬‫‪115 ......... C Electronic Viewfinder‬‬‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ‬‫)‪86 .................... (Keystone Comp.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ‪87 .........................................‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪105 .........‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫)‪107 .............. (KControl Settings‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫)‪109 ...................(G/Info Settings‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ‬‫]‪110 .... [# Slow Limit] [# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪110 ..............‬‬‫‪116‬‬‫ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪116 .......................(DPOF‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪116 ..........................‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪116 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ )‪117 .......... (PictBridge‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ ‪118 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪118 ..........................‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪120‬‬‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪120 .........................‬‬‫ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪122 ......... OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫‪5 AR‬‬‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪123 ..........................................‬‬‫‪ - Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪145 ........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬‫‪125 .................................... OI.Share‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪146 ......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪126‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪126 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪155‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪155 .................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ ‪126 ......‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ‪126 .........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪127 ............................‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪128 .................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫‪129‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪129 ..................M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫‪133‬‬‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪133 ..................... (HLD-7‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪134 .....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ‪135 ....................‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪136 ..............‬‬‫ﺇﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪137 ............................‬‬‫ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪138 ....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪140‬‬‫ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪140 .................‬‬‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪142 ......................................‬‬‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ‪144 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪144 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪144 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪144 .‬‬‫‪AR 6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪152 .......................................‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫‪161‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬‫‪176‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬‫‪(A) iAUTO‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺳﻬﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ )‪(ART‬‬‫‪44‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫‪71‬‬‫ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪46‬‬‫ﺗﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬‫‪Live Guide‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫‪51‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬‫‪Live Guide‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪Live Guide‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ )‪(ART‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬‫‪AF Area‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪39‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪40‬‬‫‪58‬‬‫‪59‬‬‫‪70‬‬‫‪44‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪54‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫‪) C-AF+TR‬ﺗﻌﻘﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫‪75‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺔ‬‫‪) 8‬ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺔ(‬‫‪96‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪DIS Mode/ISO‬‬‫‪46/59‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Anti-Shock z‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪(Picture Mode) Gradation‬‬‫ﻟﻸﺿﻭﺍء‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪68‬‬‫‪97‬‬‫‪57‬‬‫‪137‬‬‫‪52‬‬‫‪80‬‬‫‪41‬‬‫‪41‬‬‫‪46‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻫﺩ ًﻓﺎ ﻣﺗﺣﺭ ًﻛﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻲ ﺇﺣﺳﺎﺳًﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪/‬ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻁﺧﺎﺕ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻓﺎﺗﺣﺔ‬‫ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪/‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬‫‪56‬‬‫‪56‬‬‫‪Noise Reduct.‬‬‫‪96‬‬‫‪(Picture Mode) Gradation‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ‪/‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫‪Highlight&Shadow Control‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪Live View Boost‬‬‫‪80‬‬‫‪51/37‬‬‫‪51‬‬‫‪91‬‬‫‪95‬‬‫‪7 AR‬‬‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‬‫‪Test Picture‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬‫‪37‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻣﺩ‬‫‪Displayed Grid‬‬‫‪95‬‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫‪(Rec View) Autoq‬‬‫‪91‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪57‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬‫‪57‬‬‫ﺇﻁﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪Sleep‬‬‫‪96‬‬‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫‪72‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻣﻳﻕ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫‪HDMI/Video Out‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫‪95‬‬‫‪105‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬‫‪67‬‬‫ﺗﻔﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ‬‫‪(JPEG Edit) Shadow Adj‬‬‫‪89‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬‫‪(JPEG Edit) Redeye Fix‬‬‫‪89‬‬‫ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬‫‪117‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪116‬‬‫ﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪Connection to Smartphone‬‬‫‪64‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫‪AR 8‬‬‫‪103‬‬‫‪103‬‬‫‪123‬‬‫‪113‬‬‫‪90‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪79‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪Myset‬‬‫‪79‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪91‬‬

‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪USB‬‬‫‪CB-USB6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬‫ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫‪BLN-1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪FL-LM2‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ‬‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﻳﺕ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫‪BCN-1‬‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻣﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺃﺧﻳﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺷﺩﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪9 AR‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬

‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪n‬‬

‫‪f‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪j‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪18 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ* )‪(o‬‬‫‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪110 ،60 ،58 ،41-38 ،23 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ................................... Fn2‬ﺹ‪51 ،23 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) R/H‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ( ‪ ............‬ﺹ‪/33 .‬ﺹ‪103 ،22 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ* )‪........ (r‬ﺹ‪41-38 ،31 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪21 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪/57 .‬ﺹ‪93 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪14 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) Y‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬‫‪ .....................................................‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) Z‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ(‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪103 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ )ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪(.‬‬‫‪ b‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪18 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ‪......................‬ﺹ‪90 ،76 ،66 .‬‬‫*‬‫‪AR 10‬‬‫‪ d‬ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ .............................. ON/OFF‬ﺹ‪16 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪v‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) AFm‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪75 ،74 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) jYHDR‬ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ(‬‫‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪60 ،57 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪136 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬‫‪ h‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ‪ .........................................‬ﺹ‪9 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬‫‪ j‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪14 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪ l‬ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ )ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪(l3.5‬‬‫‪ m‬ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪ .................... (D‬ﺹ‪105 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ‪ .................‬ﺹ‪120 ،117 ،105 .‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ‪ r‬ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪8‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪c‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪g‬‬
‫‪h‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬

‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪i‬‬
‫‪n‬‬

‫‪j‬‬

‫‪m‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪l‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪112 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻗﺭﺹ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻭﺑﺗﺭ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪20 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ..................................(LV) u‬ﺹ‪19 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ( ‪ .....‬ﺹ‪62 ،36 ،34 ،27 ،16 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ‪..........................‬ﺹ‪38 ،20 ،19 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬‫‪ 7‬ﻓﻧﺟﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪137 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪134 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.................. AFL/AEL‬ﺹ‪102 ،51 ،32 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪94 ،41 – 38 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ................................INFO‬ﺹ‪62 ،37 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ......................................... Fn1‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ..................................... Q‬ﺹ‪77 ،30 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ* ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪31 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ................................... MENU‬ﺹ‪77 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) q‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪63 ،31 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) D‬ﻣﺳﺢ( ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪33 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬‫‪ j‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ ................. (PBH‬ﺹ‪133 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ....................‬ﺹ‪12 .‬‬‫‪ l‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪12 .‬‬‫‪ m‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪13 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪13 .‬‬‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ‪ HIGF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪11 AR‬‬‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻩ )‪(‬‬‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ٍ‬‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﺑﻠﻭﻥ‬‫ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‬‫ﺧﻠﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ‬‫ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫)ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ :‬ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﺛﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ "ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(126 .‬‬‫‪AR 12‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻳﺭﺓ‬‫ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬‫• ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺭﱢ ﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(127 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(36 .‬‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ "ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪ (127 .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪13 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺣﻣﺭﺍء( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ )ﺣﻣﺭﺍء( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ )ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ‪.(3‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪UNLOCK‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪UNLOCK‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ )‪ (1‬ﻟﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪.(2‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ )‪ (4‬ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪.(3) UNLOCK‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ "ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ" )ﺹ‪.(129 .‬‬‫‪AR 14‬‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪UNLOCK‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺯﻉ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻏﻠﻕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻙ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪UNLOCK‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪ UNLOCK‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻓﻙ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪15 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.OFF‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ON‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ON/OFF‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪i-Enhance‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫; )ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪) :‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫] )ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‪ :‬ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ" )ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻧﺷﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ )ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ُﺗﺭﻛﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 16‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [X‬ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪) [d‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪MENU‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﺑﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [d‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [X‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪Keystone Comp.‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬‫‪--.--.-- --:-‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪j±0 k±0‬‬‫‪0.5sec‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪W‬‬

‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪c/# Menu Display‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[d‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺃﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫‪Y/M/D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪2013‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪17 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺑﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﻛﻝ‬‫‪ A‬ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﺭﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﺗﺩﺋﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ‪.‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﻌﻳﻡ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‬‫ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫‪SCN‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪J‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ .PHOTO STORY‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬‫‪i-Enhance‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬‫‪AR 18‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺗﺿﻲء ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ُﺗﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻳﻧﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪u‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺗﺭﺏ ﻋﻳﻧﻙ ﻣﻧﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﻁﻔﺊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬

‫‪Q‬‬

‫‪Q‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،Q‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪.‬‬‫)ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،A‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪(.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،Q‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪19 AR‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،u‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪u‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪i-Enhance‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﻫ ًﺗﺎ‬‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻭﺑﺗﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ‬‫ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻊ ﻋﻳﻧﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺣﺫﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻ‬‫ﺗﻌﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬‫‪AR 20‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪(.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )((‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺿﺭ )ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻳﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(140 .‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪(.‬‬‫• ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺻﻭ ًﺗﺎ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻛﻠﻳًﺎ‬‫ﻳﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻁﻠﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ "ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ" ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ "ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫)ﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ( ﻛﻠﻳًﺎ"‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪.[Style 1‬‬‫‪) [Built-in EVF Style] v‬ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.u‬‬‫‪) [EVF Auto Switch] v‬ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬‫‪21 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ‪ .(PHOTO STORY) J‬ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻅﺭﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(27 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪R‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪00:02:18‬‬‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ،CMOS‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬‫ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻭﺿﺑﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻭﺿﺑﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ؛ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ )ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪/(.‬ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺿﻭﺍء‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/Panorama/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Hand-Held ،e-Portrait) SCN‬‬‫‪/(3D ،Starlight‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‬‫‪AR 22‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺭّ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ .Fn2‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ [a‬ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Fn2/Q‬‬‫‪Fn2‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ ‪.Fn2‬‬‫‪Fn2‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫‪Fn2‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬‫‪HI LIGHT‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪SHADOW‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪Color Creator‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬‫‪) b‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ( )ﺹ‪(51 .‬‬‫‪) (Color Creator) c‬ﺹ‪(60 .‬‬‫‪) a‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ( )ﺹ‪(56 .‬‬‫‪) d‬ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( )ﺹ‪(71 .‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪(r‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪(o‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪23 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬

‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪c ba‬‬‫‪e d‬‬‫‪f‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪52 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪73 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ................‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫‪ 7‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ‪ ................................N‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ‪ ..........................................J‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ ‪ .........................................T‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪ ..................................z‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ‪ ......................x‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ......................... y‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪98 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪103 ،94 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪55 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪74 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪75 .‬‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،J ،SCN‬ﺃﻭ ‪.n‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺎ )ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ( ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫• ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪AR 24‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫‪ .u‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪u‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫• ُﺗﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺎ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪" v .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ" )ﺹ‪(27 .‬‬‫• ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.u‬‬‫‪) [EVF Auto Switch] v‬ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬‫‪25 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ‪ .(PHOTO STORY) J‬ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(27 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪R‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪00:02:18‬‬‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ،CMOS‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬‫ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻭﺿﺑﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻭﺿﺑﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ؛ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ )ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪/(.‬ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺿﻭﺍء‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/Panorama/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Hand-Held ،e-Portrait) SCN‬‬‫‪/(3D ،Starlight‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‬‫‪AR 26‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪V‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ) ‪( V‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ S‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪5x‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪T‬‬

‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪Y‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣُﺛﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ" )ﺹ‪،(123 .‬‬‫"ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪) "OI.Share‬ﺹ‪(125 .‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪27 AR‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .(A) iAUTO‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ‪ iAUTO‬ﻭﺿﻌًﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺃﻣﺭً ﺍ ﺳﻬﻼً‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ a‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ k‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[Shooting Tips‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬‫]‪ [Blur Background‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[Express Motions‬ﺳﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺭﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ 2‬ﻭ‪ 3‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﺿﺑﺎﻥ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬‫‪Clear & Vivid‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪Flat & Muted‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺿﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪.v‬‬‫• ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،Q‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 28‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]‪ [Blur Background‬ﻭ]‪ [Express Motions‬ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ‪.RAW‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪.[Blurred Motion‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺗﺗﺧﻁﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪29 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪،M ،S ،A ،P‬‬‫‪ ،n‬ﻭ ‪ .J‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .............................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ...........................................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .............................................‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪44 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ................................................n‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ ...........................................‬ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ............................................‬ﺹ‪52 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪73 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪ .............................................‬ﺹ‪74 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪75 .‬‬‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ........................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪ .............................................‬ﺹ‪55 .‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪76 .‬‬‫• ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺳﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ‬‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪8‬‬‫ٍ‬‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 30‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.q‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫‪HI‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪100-0004‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪q‬‬‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪4‬‬‫• ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ G‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻣﻲ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ a‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪Q‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬

‫‪q‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪21‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪2013.10‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪10‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬‫‪31 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ a‬ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬‫]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie‬‬‫‪Movie Play‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪00:00:02/00:00:14‬‬‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﻏﻳﺭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،AFL/AEL‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪) 0‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ AFL/AEL‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪) 0‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ(‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ )‪"(Erase Selected/0/Share Order Selected‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(33 .‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 32‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬

‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ .D‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪) [Quick Erase] v .‬ﺹ‪(99 .‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Yes‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪D‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ )‪(Erase Selected/0/Share Order Selected‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺣﺫﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪H‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ؛ ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪ v‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ H‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ]‪ [0] ،[Share Order Selected‬ﻭ‬‫]‪.[Erase Selected‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪33 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬‫• ﺣﺭﻙ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬‫• ﻣﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ P‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻣﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻣﻲ‬‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ‬‫• ﻣﺭﺭ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ‪ R‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ R‬ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﺋﺫ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ‬‫ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Share Order] v‬ﺹ‪(64 .‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫ﻳﺣﻣﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪/e-portrait/3D/Panorama‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺿﻭﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪/‬ﻣﺭﺑﻊ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻅﺎﻓﺭﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺷﻳﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ‪ SCN ،ART‬ﻭ ‪ .J‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 34‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪MY1‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪PBH‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪Hi +7‬‬‫‪-3‬‬‫‪Sh-3‬‬‫‪Sh‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪Hi +7‬‬‫‪-3‬‬‫‪Sh-3‬‬‫‪Sh‬‬

‫‪a‬‬

‫‪b‬‬

‫‪MY1‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪d c‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪MY1‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪1 23‬‬‫‪PBH‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪Hi +7‬‬‫‪-3‬‬‫‪Sh-3‬‬‫‪Sh‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪gf e‬‬‫‪PBH‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫; ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫‪ :‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫] ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‪ :‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‪ .............................................‬ﺹ‪103 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪..........................‬ﺹ‪48-38 ،18 .‬‬‫‪ ............................................Myset 4‬ﺹ‪79 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬‫‪ 6‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪ ..............‬ﺹ‪128 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ‪ .................‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪73 .‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ‪ ........‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪41-38 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪41-38 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ............u‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪21 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .............................................‬ﺹ‪52 .‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ(‬‫)ﻳﻭﻣﺽ‪ٍ :‬‬‫‪ُ ) PBH g‬ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪133 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ )ﻳُﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ( ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪37 .‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪.[Style 1‬‬‫‪) [Built-in EVF Style] v‬ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬‫‪35 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪b cd‬‬‫‪e 1‬‬‫‪fj‬‬‫‪g‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪i 3‬‬‫‪j N‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪m‬‬

‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪AR 36‬‬‫‪1 2345 67 890 a‬‬‫‪FPS‬‬‫‪off‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi FP RC BKT‬‬‫‪S-IS‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪-2.0‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬

‫‪C‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫‪x‬‬

‫‪+7‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪-3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪13 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ .............................Wi-Fi‬ﺹ‪123 ،27 .‬‬‫‪ ............................Super FP flash 3‬ﺹ‪134 .‬‬‫‪ .................................... RC mode 4‬ﺹ‪135 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .....HDR/‬ﺹ‪/82 .‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪84 .‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ ‪ ........................ z‬ﺹ‪86 .‬‬‫ﻋﺎﻝ ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪95 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ٍ‬‫‪ 8‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻳﻠﻲ‪-‬ﻛﻭﻧﻔﺭﺗﺭ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪86 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪85 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪55 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪76 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ /‬ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ‪ ................ m‬ﺹ‪/132 .‬ﺹ‪143 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ..............................................‬ﺹ‪52 .‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪،‬‬‫)ﻳﻭﻣﺽ‪ٍ :‬‬‫ﻳﺿﻲء‪ :‬ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻠﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ(‬‫‪ d‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪21 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪44 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ................‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‪ ...................‬ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪73 .‬‬‫‪ l‬ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪q‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪w‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪utsr‬‬‫‪ m‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪ ..............‬ﺹ‪128 .‬‬‫‪ ........... Highlight&Shadow Control n‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫‪ o‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ....................‬ﺹ‪73 .‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ‪ ........‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫‪ p‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫‪ q‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪41-38 .‬‬‫‪ r‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪41-38 .‬‬‫‪ s‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪37 .‬‬‫‪ t‬ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪103 .‬‬‫‪ u‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ...................‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫‪ v‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪..........................‬ﺹ‪48-38 ،18 .‬‬‫‪ ............................................Myset w‬ﺹ‪79 .‬‬‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪ .........‬ﺹ‪27 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪73 .‬‬‫‪ z‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫‪ A‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪75 .‬‬‫‪ B‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪74 .‬‬‫‪ C‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪52 .‬‬‫‪ D‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫; ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ(‪ :‬ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫)ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺷﺭ‬‫ﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪(.‬‬‫‪ :‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ(‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫] ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‪ :‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫‪ E‬ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬‫‪ ‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ‬‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬‫ﻟﻛﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ "ﺍﻷﻓﻕ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻛﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪37 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ "ﺻﻮّﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ" )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(P‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،P‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.P‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪Hi +7‬‬‫‪Sh-3‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪MY1‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪PBH‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫• ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪r‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﻳﻥ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺗﺎ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ(‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪"60 F2.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻥ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪8000 F22‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ )ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء(‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪) [ISO] v .‬ﺹ‪(59 .‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪(Ps‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ ،ART‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ"‪ "s‬ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ‬‫"‪."s‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Ps‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫‪AR 38‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪(A‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،A‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪r‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻝ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪F‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺧﻔﻑ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ F‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ( ﻣﻥ‬‫ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﺧﻔﺽ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫‪F16 F8.0 F5.6 F3.5 F2‬‬‫• ﺳﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪"30 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪8000 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ )ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء‬‫• ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪) [ISO] v .‬ﺹ‪(59 .‬‬‫‪39 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ‪(S‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،S‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.S‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪r‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ‬‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺿﻳﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ ‪‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ‬‫”‪1000 400 100 60 15 1” 2‬‬‫• ﺳﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪2000 F2.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬‫‪125 F22‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ )ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء‬‫• ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪) [ISO] v .‬ﺹ‪(59 .‬‬‫‪AR 40‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪(M‬‬‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،BULB‬ﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣً ﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ٍ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪r‬‬

‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 1/4000‬ﻭ ‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[LIVE TIME‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪.[LIVECOMP‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ )ﻟﻸﺿﻭﺍء‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ(‬‫ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ]‪ [BULB‬ﻭ ]‪ [LIVE TIME‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ )‪:(BULB‬‬‫ﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )‪ :(TIME‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ BULB‬ﻭ‪ TIME‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪) [BULB/TIME Monitor] v‬ﺹ‪(97 .‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[LIVE TIME‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪) [Live BULB‬ﺹ‪ (97 .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻧﺟﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Composite Settings‬ﺹ‪.(97 .‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[LIVECOMP‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[LIVECOMP‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [Composite Settings‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻛﻝ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ‬‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﻫﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪41 AR‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻗﻳﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ )ﺹ‪.(137 .‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻗﻳﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪/‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪/‬ﻣﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ* ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪ [Live BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Live TIME‬ﺹ‪.(97 .‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬‫• ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ]‪ [Noise Reduct.‬ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻭﻟﺩ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ٍ ISO‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺷﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪) [Noise Reduct.] v .‬ﺹ‪(96 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪(n‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )‪ (n‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪" v .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ" )ﺹ‪(71 .‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗِﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ]‪[Movie Effect‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪AR 42‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Old Film‬‬‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻭﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪One Shot Echo‬‬‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗِﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗِﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻳﺯﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻛﻝ ﻟﻣﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻣﺯ ﺗﺿﻳﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪Art Fade‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﺷﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﺭ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‪.‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬‫‪Movie Tele-converter‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie Tele-converter‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ O‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫‪.Movie tele-converter‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.HIGF‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ N‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪Multi Echo‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗِﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗِﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺧﻠﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﻔﻳﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻥ ﻓﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ؛ ﺃﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ [Diorama] ،[e-Portrait‬ﻭ ]‪ [Color Creator‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻊ ‪.Art Fade‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻭﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪43 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ART‬‬‫• ﺳ ُﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺷﺣً ﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬‫‪Pop Art j‬‬‫‪Soft Focus k‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color l‬‬‫‪Light Tone m‬‬‫‪Grainy Film n‬‬‫‪Pin Hole o‬‬‫‪Diorama s‬‬‫‪Cross Process t‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Gentle Sepia u‬‬‫‪Dramatic Tone v‬‬‫‪Key Line Y‬‬‫‪Watercolor Z‬‬‫‪Vintage G‬‬‫‪Partial Color H‬‬‫‪) ART BKT u‬ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ‪(ART‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ‪ART‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪ I‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ II‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻭﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ*‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻘﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺑﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻭء ﻧﺟﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‬‫* ﺗﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ "ﺣﺑﻳﺑﻳﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﻡ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺷﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬‫ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 44‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪[Partial Color‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[Partial Color‬‬‫‪COLOR‬‬‫ﻅﻠﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻟﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ART‬‬‫‪45 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SCN‬‬‫• ﺳ ُﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺷﻬﺩًﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ I‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫‪J‬‬

‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Portrait‬‬‫‪e-Portrait‬‬‫‪Landscape‬‬‫‪Landscape+Portrait‬‬‫‪Sport‬‬‫‪Hand-Held Starlight‬‬‫‪Night Scene‬‬‫‪Night+Portrait‬‬‫‪Children‬‬‫‪High Key‬‬‫‪Low Key‬‬‫‪DIS Mode‬‬‫‪Macro‬‬‫‪Nature Macro r‬‬‫‪Candle Q‬‬‫‪Sunset R‬‬‫‪Documents T‬‬‫‪) Panorama s‬ﺹ‪(47 .‬‬‫‪Fireworks c‬‬‫‪Beach & Snow g‬‬‫‪n Fisheye Effect f‬‬‫‪n Wide-Angle w‬‬‫‪n Macro m‬‬‫‪3D Photo T‬‬‫‪Panning J‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]‪ [Panning‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‪ .‬ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ J‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ‪ I‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[e-Portrait‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪ :‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ]‪ [e-Portrait‬ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻫﻭ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬‫‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[Panorama] ،[Hand-Held Starlight] ،[e-Portrait‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[3D Photo‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Hand-Held Starlight‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻫﻭ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫• ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ]‪ [3D Photo‬ﻟﻠﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ [3D Photo‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.1080 × 1920‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ‪.RAW‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ‪.100%‬‬‫‪AR 46‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]‪.[Panning‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﻊ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‬‫ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[n Wide-Angle] ،[n Fisheye Effect‬ﻭ ]‪ [n Macro‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺿﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺳﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﻳﺔ‪" v .‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ" )ﺹ ‪(120.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Panorama‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫]‪[3‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫]‪[2‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SCN‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﻱ )‪ (g‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻟﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻳﻌﻭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻳﻧﻬﻲ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪47 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪PHOTO STORY‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪Standard‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪B‬‬

‫‪Speed‬‬‫‪C‬‬‫‪Zoom In/Out‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Layout‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪Fun Frames‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪Works in progress‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻧﺳﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻣﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪E‬‬‫‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‬‫‪ PHOTO STORY H G F‬ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻧﺳﺏ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻭﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪AR 48‬‬‫‪Standard‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻬﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.0‬‬‫‪Save‬‬‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Finish later‬‬‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻻﺣﻕ )ﺹ ‪.(49.‬‬‫‪Discard‬‬‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ D‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.O‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.0‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،MENU‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻺﻧﻬﺎء ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ‪ ،‬ﻅﻠﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪2014.07.01 12:30‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻔﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ ،PHOTO STORY‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﻭ ]‪/(.[Speed‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪49 AR‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪AR 50‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ‪ .RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫]‪.[4:3‬‬‫• ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ]‪ [MF] ،[S-AF] ،[AF Mode‬ﻭ ]‪ [S-AF+MF‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫‪/Movie‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﻭ ]‪/([Speed‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪Picture mode/Digital Tele-converter/‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ INFO/Fn2/Fn1‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ ،PHOTO STORY‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺑﺔ )"‪ ("+‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻟﺑﺔ )"–"( ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺑـ ‪.EV ±5.0‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪.SCN‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ .±3.0EV‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ‪ ،±3.0EV‬ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.±3.0EV‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Highlight&Shadow Control‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ .Fn2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪HI LIGHT‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﺳﺎﻟﺏ )–(‬

‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ )‪(0‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺟﺏ )‪(+‬‬‫‪SHADOW‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ )‪(AE Lock‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ .AFL/AEL‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ AFL/AEL‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪"AEL/AFL" v .u‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(102 .‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ AFL/AEL‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﺭ ‪ ،MENU‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪51 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣُﺻﺩﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء‪.‬‬‫• ‪" v‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ" )ﺹ‪(15 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪Flash Mode‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪Flash Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺗﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ُﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪" v .‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ" )ﺹ‪(53 .‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء‬‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫!‪#!/‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ S‬ﻭ‬‫‪ ،M‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪#SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬‫ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪!SLOW‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‪/‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬‫ﻳﺿﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬‫‪/#SLOW2‬‬‫‪2nd‬‬‫‪Curtain‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‬‫ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺧﻠﻑ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪،#FULL‬‬‫‪ #1/4‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬‫ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻳﻥ ﻳﻔﺿﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫‪ ،INFO‬ﻓﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 52‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻛﻠﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]!‪) #!/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء([‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ]!‪) #!/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء([ ﺑﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/320‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻝء‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪P/A‬‬‫‪#AUTO‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫!‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء(‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫!‬‫‪SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء(‬‫‪#SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬‫‪SLOW2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬‫‪#‬‬‫‪S/M‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء‬‫!‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء(‬‫‪$‬‬‫‪2nd-C‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻁﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬‫‪ 1/30‬ﺙ‪– .‬‬‫‪ 1/320‬ﺙ‪*.‬‬‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 30‬ﺙ‪– .‬‬‫‪ 1/320‬ﺙ‪*.‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻁﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ‪– .‬‬‫‪ 1/320‬ﺙ‪*.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ‪– .‬‬‫‪ 1/320‬ﺙ‪*.‬‬‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء‪/‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ‪– .‬‬‫‪ 1/320‬ﺙ‪*.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪ $ ،#AUTO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.A‬‬‫* ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻅﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬‫ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ‬‫ﻟﻺﺧﺭﺍﺝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪ 42 – 14‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ‬‫ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻧﺻﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻓﻲ‬‫‪ 0.25‬ﻡ‬‫‪ 17‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 0.25‬ﻡ‬‫‪ 150 – 40‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﻡ‬‫‪ 150 – 14‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﻡ‬‫‪ 50 – 12‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 0.45‬ﻡ‬‫‪ 40 – 12‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 3.2‬ﻡ )ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫‪ 12‬ﻣﻡ(‬‫‪ 0.7‬ﻡ )ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫‪ 14‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ(‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﻳﻠﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﻁﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ‪ f‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪53 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )‪(AF Area‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ‪ 81‬ﻫﺩ ًﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ" ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺭﻛﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﺳﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Micro Four Thirds‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ 81‬ﻫﺩﻑ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ 37‬ﻫﺩﻑ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﺹ‪.(55 .‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪GF‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪) o‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ(‬‫‪) I‬ﻫﺩﻑ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺕ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪) K‬ﻫﺩﻑ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪) J‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ(‬‫ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻌﻭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﻫﺩﻑ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ" ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 54‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺣﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬‫ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻭﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻭﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ )‪ (ESP‬ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪.AF‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪J‬‬

‫‪Face Priority Off‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪I‬‬‫‪Face Priority On‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫‪Face & Eye Priority On‬‬‫ﻳﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺅﺑﺅ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪L‬‬

‫‪Face & R. Eye Priority On‬‬‫ﻳﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺅﺑﺅ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Face & L. Eye Priority On‬‬‫ﻳﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺅﺑﺅ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻁ ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺣﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺑﺅﺑﺅ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[(Digital ESP metering) p‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺟﻭﻩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪ .[MF‬ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﻔﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء‪.‬‬‫‪55 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻐﻁﻳﻬﺎ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Q/U‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪F‬‬

‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫)ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ(‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ]‪ [U‬ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪) [Button Function‬ﺹ‪.(103 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪ a‬ﻛﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ U‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ U‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ‪(14× ،10× ،7× ،5× ،3×) .‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺭﻛﻪ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 56‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣ َُﻭ ﱢﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺩّﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪Sequential H‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ 10‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ )]‪،[S-AF‬‬‫]‪.([MF‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪Sequential L‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ 6.5‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪) [AF Mode‬ﺹ‪ (75 .‬ﻭ ]‪[AEL/AFL‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(102 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪ 12 Y12s‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻻً‪،‬‬‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Y2s‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﻣﺽ‬‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪YC‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ]‪ [Y Timer‬ﻭ]‪ [Frame‬ﻭ]‪ [Interval Time‬ﻭ‬‫]‪ .[Every Frame AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [Every Frame AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) INFO‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‬‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ‬‫‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ jYHDR‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.jYHDR‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ‪ ،S‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ‪ ،T‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﻁﺎﻗﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﺑﺩﺃ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻘﻑ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺣﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪57 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬‫ﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )‪ (WB‬ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺩ‬‫]‪ [AUTO‬ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺷﻝ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺗﻌﻣﺩ ﻟﻸﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،2‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪500‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪AUTO LOW 200‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪320‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Recommend‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‬‫‪AR 58‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻏﻠﺏ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺟﺯء ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪5300K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺻﺎ ٍ‬‫ﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪7500K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺻﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬

‫‪O‬‬

‫‪6000K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﻣﻠﺑﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻳﻭﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪3000K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻧﺟﺳﺗﻳﻥ‬‫>‬‫‪4000K‬‬‫ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺄﺿﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻭﺳﻧﺕ‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪5500K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬‫)ﺹ‪(59 .‬‬‫‪/Q/P‬‬‫‪X/W‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻭﻥ‬‫ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬‫‪CWB‬‬‫‪– 2000K‬‬‫‪14000K‬‬‫ﻟﻼﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺿﺎ ًء‬‫ﺑﻧﻭﻉ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬

‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬‫ﻗﺱ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻔﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) Y‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ ،W ،Q ،P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ X‬ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪.INFO‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ ،W ،Q ،P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ X‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻛﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺳﺎﻁﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺧﻔﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]‪ [WB NG Retry‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻭﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ )ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﻲ( ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻑ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻑ ﻫﻭ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ — ISO 200‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ — ﺛﻡ ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺟﻬّﺯ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻅﻼﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،2‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪25600 – 200 ،LOW‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪59 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )‪(Color Creator‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺩّﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (Color Creator) c‬ﻣُﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ )ﺹ‪.(23 .‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Fn2‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Color Creator‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪ (Color Creator) c‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪.(70 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.AUTO‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‬‫ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ‪ .(HDR‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﻳﻥ ]‪ [HDR1‬ﻭ]‪ [HDR2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ .S‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.HDR‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ jYHDR‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3F‬‬‫‪3.0EV‬‬‫‪7F‬‬‫‪2.0EV‬‬‫‪5F‬‬‫‪2.0EV‬‬‫‪3F‬‬‫‪2.0EV‬‬‫‪HDR2‬‬‫‪HDR1‬‬‫‪OFF AUTO‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪jYHDR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫‪AR 60‬‬‫‪jY‬‬‫‪Yc‬‬‫‪Y12s Y2s‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪HDR1‬‬‫‪HDR2‬‬‫‪3F 2.0EV‬‬‫‪5F 2.0EV‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ‪ 4‬ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻭﻓﺭ]‪ [HDR2‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺟﺎﺏ ﻣﻥ ]‪.[HDR1‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.200‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺑﻁء ﻗﺩﺭﻩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪7F 2.0EV‬‬‫‪3F 3.0EV‬‬‫‪5F 3.0EV‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ]‪ [HDR1‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[HDR2‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ .RAW+JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪RAW‬‬‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[HDR2]/[HDR1‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Natural‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪ .[sRGB‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ]‪.[Full-time AF‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻬﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪61 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﺑﺳﻁ‬‫‪3 4 5 67 89‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪jk‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬

‫‪3D 4:3 L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬

‫‪b‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪×10‬‬

‫‪l‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫‪r‬‬

‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪45mm‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪+1.0‬‬‫‪AF‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪A+4‬‬‫‪ISO 400‬‬‫‪G+4‬‬‫‪Adobe‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪4608×3456‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪3D 4:3 L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪SD‬‬

‫‪h‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫‪15‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪SD‬‬‫‪ed c‬‬‫‪wvuts‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪16 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ .............................Wi-Fi‬ﺹ‪123 ،27 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ .........GPS‬ﺹ‪125 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ‪ ..........................Eye-Fi‬ﺹ‪101 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪116 .‬‬‫‪ .................................. Share order 6‬ﺹ‪64 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪66 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ ..............................................‬ﺹ‪66 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪33 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪99 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫‪ b‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪127 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ........................................ 3D‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ ........‬ﺹ‪49 .‬‬‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪ ......................... HDR1/HDR2‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪17 .‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪45mm‬‬‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪±0‬‬‫‪G±10‬‬‫‪Adobe‬‬‫‪A±10‬‬‫‪ISO 400‬‬‫‪±0.0‬‬‫‪AF‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪AR 62‬‬‫‪x‬‬‫‪ g‬ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪..........................‬ﺹ‪48-38 ،18 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪41-38 .‬‬‫‪ l‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪41-38 .‬‬‫‪ m‬ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ............................‬ﺹ‪132 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪73 .‬‬‫‪ o‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫‪ p‬ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪98 .‬‬‫‪ q‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ r‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫‪ s‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫‪ t‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫‪ u‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫‪ v‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪110 .‬‬‫‪ w‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪74 .‬‬‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪37 .‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‬‫‪g‬‬‫‪4032×3024‬‬‫‪L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﺑﺳﻁ‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪Q‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪2013.10‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪ 25‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪16‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ(‬

‫‪q‬‬

‫‪q‬‬

‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫‪p‬‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ×‪2‬‬‫‪14x‬‬‫‪p‬‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ×‪14‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪(o‬‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )‪/(p‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ )‪(q‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪(r‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )‪/(t‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )‪(s‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ‬‫)‪(HIGF‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )‪/(I‬ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )‪/(H‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )‪(GF‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ‪ :‬ﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )‪ (I‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )‪ (H‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‪ :‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫‪Fn1‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪Fn1‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Fn1‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(33 .‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(32 .‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(33 .‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ )ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪63 AR‬‬‫ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪(Share Order) Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ‪ .(123 .‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪،‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[Share Order‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪AR 64‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ‪ HI‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ h‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ h‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ h‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ]‪.[Share Order‬‬‫• ﺑﻌﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺄﺳﻳﺱ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫]‪.[One-Time‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪ Share Order‬ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 200‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ]‪ [SD‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[HD‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ H) Motion JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(I‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Rotate‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫*‬‫‪ v RAW Data Edit ،JPEG Edit‬ﺹ‪89 ،88 .‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪ v Image Overlay‬ﺹ‪90 .‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪Movie Play‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪ v Share Order‬ﺹ‪64 .‬‬‫‪‬‬‫‪*‬‬‫‪) 0‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ(‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) R‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ(‬

‫‪‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪Rotate‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪(Slideshow) m‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪Erase‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ]‪ [SD‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[HD‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‬‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪ HI‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪H/I‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﺟﻳﻌﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪G/F‬‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪65 AR‬‬‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﻏﻳﺭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ ،Q‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪F‬‬
‫ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪) 0‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ G‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ‪" v .‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ‬‫)‪) "(Erase Selected/0/Share Order Selected‬ﺹ‪(33 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Rotate‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪) 0‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ(‬‫• ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺗﻲ )ﻣﺩﺗﻪ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺗﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻲ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [R‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[No‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Rotate‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [R Start‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪.H‬‬‫• ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Erase‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.2‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪R Start‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Rotate‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ G‬ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ؛ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 66‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬‫ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[m‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Rotate‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪BGM‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Joy‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪Slide‬‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪Slide Interval‬‬‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺷﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪10‬‬‫ٍ‬‫‪Movie Interval‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Full‬ﻟﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻭ]‪ [Short‬ﻟﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺗﺎﺣﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Start‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ‬‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫‪Start‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]‪ [Joy‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺟّ ﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Olympus‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪[Joy‬‬‫ﻣﻥ ]‪ [BGM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ .I‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪http://support.olympus-imaging.com/bgmdownload/‬‬‫‪67 AR‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ) ُﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣ ًﺩﺩ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫‪IS Mode‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Focal Length‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪mm‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO 50‬‬‫‪S-IS‬‬‫‪S-IS‬‬‫‪OFF S-IS‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫‪Still-I.S. Off‬‬‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS1‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS2‬‬‫‪Vertical IS‬‬‫ﻳﻁﺑﻕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ )‪ (Y‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS3‬‬‫‪Horizontal IS‬‬‫ﻳﻁﺑﻕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ )‪ (Z‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻳًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪.Auto I.S‬‬‫ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻭﺗﻁﺑﻕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫‪Movie-I.S. Off‬‬‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪ON‬‬‫‪Movie-I.S.‬‬‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪(Four Thirds/Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪.Four Thirds‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ ،[Image Stabilizer‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 8‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭ‪ 1,000‬ﻣﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 68‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻣﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻁ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻝ‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻡ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[OFF‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[S-IS-AUTO‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ [S-IS1‬ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ‬‫]‪.[S-IS-AUTO‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪69 AR‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ )ﺹ‪ .(80 .‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[Picture Mode‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪C‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪j‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪h‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪i-Enhance‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﻺﻋﺟﺎﺏ ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪Vivid‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Z‬‬‫‪Muted‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻁﻔﺄﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪J‬‬‫‪Monotone‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫‪Custom‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺟّ ﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪e-Portrait‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪Color Creator‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪) color creator‬ﺹ‪.(60 .‬‬‫‪Pop Art j‬‬‫‪Soft Focus k‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color l‬‬‫‪Light Tone m‬‬‫‪Grainy Film n‬‬‫‪Pin Hole o‬‬‫‪Diorama s‬‬‫‪Cross Process t‬‬‫‪Gentle Sepia u‬‬‫‪Dramatic Tone v‬‬‫‪Key Line Y‬‬‫‪Watercolor Z‬‬‫‪Vintage G‬‬‫‪Partial Color H‬‬‫‪AR 70‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬‫]‪ ،[Partial Color‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) INFO‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪n‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،n‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪M-IS ON‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪Program Auto‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 1/30‬ﺙ ﻭ ‪ 1/4000‬ﺙ‪.‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 1/30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭ ‪ 1/4000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ISO 200‬ﻭ‪3200‬؛ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﻔﻳﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺷﺩﻳﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺻﻳﺭ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻥ ﻓﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪F‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪) [4:3‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [1:1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[3:4‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩّﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﺹ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ؛ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﺹ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪71 AR‬‬‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ(‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻣﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩّﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪4608x3456‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪L F+‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪SN‬‬‫‪MN‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪L‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ YF) JPEG‬ﻭ‪ YN‬ﻭ‪ XN‬ﻭ‪ .(WN‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪RAW‬‬‫ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺿﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪ Y‬ﻭ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ (W‬ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )‪ SF‬ﻭ‪ F‬ﻭ‪ N‬ﻭ‪.(B‬‬‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬‫‪) Y‬ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬‫‪*3456×4608‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫‪SF‬‬‫)ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ(‬‫‪F‬‬‫)ﺩﻗﻳﻕ(‬‫‪N‬‬‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬‫‪B‬‬‫)ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ(‬‫‪YSF‬‬‫‪*YF‬‬‫‪*YN‬‬‫‪YB‬‬‫‪2400×3200‬‬‫‪) X‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ(‬‫‪*1920×2560‬‬‫‪1440×1920‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪*XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ‬‫‪1200×1600‬‬‫‪*960×1280‬‬‫‪) W‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‬‫‪768×1024‬‬‫‪480×640‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪*WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ‬‫* ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪RAW‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ )ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ "‪ (".ORF‬ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻧﺳﺢ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪JPEG‬‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪" v .‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ" )ﺹ‪(88 .‬‬‫‪AR 72‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫‪Full HD Fine‬‬‫‪1080×1920‬‬‫‪Full HD Normal‬‬‫‪1080×1920‬‬‫‪HD Fine‬‬‫‪720×1280‬‬‫‪HD Normal‬‬‫‪720×1280‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪720×1280‬‬‫‪SD‬‬‫‪480×640‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬‫‪/MPEG-4 AVC‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪*H.264‬‬‫‪*Motion JPEG‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬‫• ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 29‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﺿﺎ ًء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺭﺿًﺎ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻳﺱ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.MANUAL‬‬‫• ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻁﺭﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪73 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ )ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.AFm‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪.‬‬‫‪SH‬‬‫‪HI‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ESP‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪AFm‬‬‫‪Single AF‬‬‫‪TR‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪AUTO C-AF MF‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻱ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬‫ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻗﻳﺎﺳًﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪I‬‬‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ )ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 2%‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ(‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪IHI‬‬‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬‫ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ‪ 324‬ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬‫ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ]‪ [OFF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫]‪ ([I Face Priority‬ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪ ISH‬ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪AR 74‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.AFm‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪SH‬‬‫‪HI‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ESP‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪AFm‬‬‫‪Single AF‬‬‫‪TR‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪AUTO C-AF MF‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫)ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫)ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺻﺩﺭ‬‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﻭﺗﺿﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬‫ﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻝ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺿﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻐﻣﺔ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‬‫)‬‫‪MF‬‬‫)ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫‪S-AF+MF‬‬‫)ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫‪ S-AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‬‫‪C-AF+TR‬‬‫)ﺗﻌﻘﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[S-AF‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ؛ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﺑﺗﻌﻘﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻌﺩ ﺑﻭﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻌﻘﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺭﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺛﻡ ﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻳﺿﻳﻕ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻘﺏ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻘﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺟﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﺑﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺻﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪75 AR‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [AF Mode‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺽ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﺹ‪.(130 .‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻭﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫‪Movie R On‬‬‫‪OFF ON‬‬‫‪ON‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪AR 76‬‬‫• ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ‪ O‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ [AF Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [S-AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(Diorama) s‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬‫‪X‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬‫‪q‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﻣﻳﻕ‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ‪(93 .‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﻣﺛﻝ ‪ EVF‬ﻭ ‪OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫)ﺹ‪*(112 .‬‬‫‪d‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬‫*‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪Keystone Comp.‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ(‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪MENU‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪j /Y‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Settings‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪T Off‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪Y12s Off‬‬‫‪Y2s Off‬‬‫‪YC Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪j /Y‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Settings‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(146 .‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪77 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪Shooting Menu 2/Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪Keystone Comp.‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪AR 78‬‬‫‪) Card Setup‬ﺹ‪(78 .‬‬‫‪) Reset/Myset‬ﺹ‪(79 .‬‬‫‪) Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪(80 .‬‬‫‪) K‬ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪) Image Aspect‬ﺹ‪(71 .‬‬‫‪) Digital Tele-converter‬ﺹ‪(86 .‬‬‫‪) Keystone Comp.‬ﺹ‪(86 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪) j/Y‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬‫)ﺹ‪(81 ،57 .‬‬‫‪) Image Stabilizer‬ﺹ‪(68 .‬‬‫‪) Bracketing‬ﺹ‪(82 .‬‬‫‪) HDR‬ﺹ‪(60 .‬‬‫‪) Multiple Exposure‬ﺹ‪(84 .‬‬‫‪) Time Lapse Settings‬ﺹ‪(85 .‬‬‫‪) # RC Mode‬ﺹ‪(86 .‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card Setup‬‬‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺣﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺗﺯﺍﻝ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪" v .‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(127 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[Format‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Card Setup‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪All Erase‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﺗﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ )‪(Reset/Myset‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Shooting Menu 1 W‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻅﻠﻝ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻋﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻅﻠﻝ ]‪[Full‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(146 .‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Myset1‬‬‫‪Myset2‬‬‫‪Myset3‬‬‫‪Myset4‬‬‫‪Basic‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻅ ‪Myset‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪،A ،P‬‬‫‪ S‬ﻭ‪.M‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Shooting Menu 1 W‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ )]‪ ([Myset4]–[Myset1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‪ [Set‬ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ )]‪ ([Myset4]–[Myset1‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻣﺭﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[Reset‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪" v Myset‬ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(146 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪Myset‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ‪.Myset‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Shooting Menu 1 W‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺑﺔ )]‪ ([Myset4]–[Myset1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Basic‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Myset1‬‬‫‪Myset2‬‬‫‪Myset3‬‬‫‪Myset4‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪79 AR‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ )‪(Picture Mode‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪[Picture Mode‬‬‫)ﺹ‪ .(70 .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Picture Mode‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪Keystone Comp.‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪AR 80‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪a-i‬‬

‫‪J‬‬

‫‪K‬‬

‫‪Contrast‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﺍﻛﻥ‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪Sharpness‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪Saturation‬‬‫ﺯﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪Gradation‬‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ [Normal‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪High Key‬‬‫ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪Low Key‬‬‫ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪Effect‬‬‫)‪(i-Enhance‬‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪B&W Filter‬‬‫)‪(Monotone‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻔﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬‫ﻭﺗﻐﻣﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪N:Neutral‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪Ye:Yellow‬‬‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺳﺣﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻣﺎء‬‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Or:Orange‬‬‫ﻳﺭﻛﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﻔﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺭﻭﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪R:Red‬‬‫ﻳﺭﻛﺯ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻣﺯﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪G:Green‬‬‫ﻳﺭﻛﺯ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬‫ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺿﺭﺍء‪.‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪h‬‬‫‪Pict. Tone‬‬‫)‪(Monotone‬‬‫‪a-i‬‬

‫‪J‬‬

‫‪K‬‬

‫ﻟﺗﻠﻭﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪N:Neutral‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪S:Sepia‬‬‫ﺑﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻥ‬‫‪B:Blue‬‬‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‬‫‪P:Purple‬‬‫ﺃﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻳﺔ‬‫‪G:Green‬‬‫ﺧﺿﺭﺍء‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ]‪.[Normal‬‬‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪(K‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ]‪ [K‬ﻓﻲ‬‫]‪.[Live Control‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺔ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ]‪ [X‬ﻭ ]‪ [W‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪.JPEG‬‬‫]‪" v [Pixel Count] ،[K Set‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ" )ﺹ‪(93 .‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪(j/Y‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [j/Y‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Shooting Menu 2 X‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪) [YC‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Settings‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Y Timer‬‬‫ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻌﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Interval Time‬‬‫ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Every Frame AF‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬‫‪81 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻧﻭﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ "ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ "ﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ" ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Bracketing‬ﻓﻲ ‪ Shooting Menu 2 X‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ I‬ﻭﺣﺩّﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Settings‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ‪ t‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ ،I‬ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟـ ]‪ [u+v‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬‫)ﺹ‪ .(94 .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ .jYHDR‬ﺣﺩّﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.jYHDR‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪) AE BKT‬ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ُﺗﻐﻳّﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ EV 0.3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EV 0.7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .EV 1.0‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻛﻠﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻛﻠﻳًﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻭﺳﻠﺑﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺇﻳﺟﺎﺑﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ 2 :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻭ ‪7‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪ t‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻧﻭﻳﻊ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪2f 0.3EV‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻌﻳﻥ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ (M‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪2f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪2f 1.0EV -‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(S‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV -‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪.[EV Step‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ" )ﺹ‪(93 .‬‬‫‪AR 82‬‬‫‪) WB BKT‬ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ )ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ S ،A ،P‬ﻭ ‪.M‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﻭﻳﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 6‬ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭﻳﻥ‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪) A – B‬ﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ – ﻣﺯﺭﻕ( ﻭ‪) G – M‬ﺃﺣﻣﺭ – ﻣﺧﺿﺭ(‪.‬‬‫‪A-B‬‬‫‪G-M‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪3f 4Step‬‬‫‪3f 4Step‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪) FL BKT‬ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻧﻭﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﻠﺑﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﺟﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺛﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪ t‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪[EV Step]. v‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV‬‬‫"ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ" )ﺹ‪(93 .‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV -‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪) ISO BKT‬ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬‫ُﺗﻐﻳّﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪0.3‬‬‫‪ EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EV 0.7‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .EV 1.0‬ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﻠﺑﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺑﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺛﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪.[ISO Step‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ" )ﺹ‪(93 .‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV -‬‬‫]‪" v .[ISO-Auto Set‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ" )ﺹ‪(93 .‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪) ART BKT‬ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ‪(ART‬‬‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻓﻧﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻓﻧﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ART BKT‬ﻭ ‪ WB BKT‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ISO BKT‬‬‫‪Soft Focus‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color‬‬‫‪Light Tone‬‬‫‪Grainy Film‬‬‫‪Pin Hole‬‬‫‪Diorama‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪83 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ(‬‫ﺳﺟﱢ ﻝ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Multiple Exposure‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Shooting Menu 2 X‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[2f‬‬‫‪Auto Gain‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪1/2‬‬‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Overlay‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ‬‫ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫‪Auto Gain‬‬‫‪Overlay‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ a‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺳﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪AR 84‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ a‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ D‬ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻛﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻟﺗﺄﻁﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻣﺭﺍﻛﺑﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ :‬ﺣﺩﺩ ‪ RAW‬ﻟـ ]‪ [K‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [Overlay‬ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪) [Edit] v :RAW‬ﺹ‪(88 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻥ ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [Overlay‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪/q‬ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪/MENU‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻳﺭ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‬‫‪ S‬ﻭ‪/M‬ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[Overlay‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺍﻛﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻛﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ]‪ [Time Lapse Settings‬ﻓﻲ ‪Shooting Menu 2 X‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Start Waiting Time‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Interval Time‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Movie‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻳﻧﺷﺊ ﻭﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﻲ ]‪ [M-JPEG HD‬ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ 10‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( )ﺹ‪ (133 .‬ﻭﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ‪ 999‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[C-AF+TR‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ]‪ [BULB‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[TIME‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﺭ ‪ ،MENU‬ﺯﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‪.‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪.MF‬‬‫• ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ]‪ [Rec View‬ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﺩﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻁﻔﺄﺓ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪85 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺟﻬﺯ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ" )ﺹ‪(135 .‬‬‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪(Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻭﻧﻔﺭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﻘﺩﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ×‪ 2‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [Digital Tele-converter‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Shooting Menu 1 W‬‬‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻌﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،J‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ،w ،f ،s ،T‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫‪.SCN‬‬‫• ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ]‪ [Movie Effect‬ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [On‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻧﺎﻗﺹ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ )‪(Keystone Comp.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺿﺧﻳﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻌﻣﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.P/A/S/M‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [Keystone Comp.‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Shooting Menu 1 W‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪18 mm‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻝ‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻐﻠﻕ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ‪ W‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪.1‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ]‪)D‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ([ )ﺹ‪ (104 .‬ﺑﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[Button Function‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 86‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺟﺭﻱ ﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW + JPEG‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬‫)‪ g‬ﺃﻭ ‪ h‬ﺃﻭ ‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (j‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻷﻣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪:‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ‪/HDR/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪/‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻭﻧﻔﺭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ [C-AF]/‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ]‪/ [C-AF+TR‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪]/‬ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ[ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪/ART‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟـ ]‪ ،[Image Stabilizer‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫]‪) [Image Stabilizer‬ﺹ‪.(68 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻣﺞ‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﺎﺛﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ jYHDR‬ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﺹ‪.(60 .‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪87 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪Playback Menu‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Edit‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫‪Reset Protect‬‬‫‪Connection to Smartphone‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪) Print Order‬ﺹ‪(116 .‬‬‫‪) Reset Protect‬ﺹ‪(90 .‬‬‫‪) Connection to Smartphone‬ﺹ‪(90 .‬‬‫‪) m‬ﺹ‪(67 .‬‬‫‪) R‬ﺹ‪(88 .‬‬‫‪) Edit‬ﺹ‪(88 .‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻠﺗﻔﺔ )‪(R‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻟﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Edit‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [Sel. Image‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [JPEG Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬‫‪ .JPEG‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﻭ ]‪JPEG‬‬‫‪ .[Edit‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [JPEG Edit‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Current‬‬‫‪RAW Data‬‬‫‪Edit‬‬‫‪Custom1‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Custom2‬‬‫‪AR 88‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬‫]‪ :[Shadow Adj‬ﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺢ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻥ ﻣُﺿﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Redeye Fix‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[P‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺫﻳﺏ ﻭ‬‫‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪O‬‬‫]‪ :[Aspect‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪) 4:3‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [1:1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ .[3:4‬ﺑﻌﺩ‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Black & White‬ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Sepia‬ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻥ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Saturation‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Q‬ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1280 × 960‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 640 × 480‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .320 × 240‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻏﻳﺭ ‪) 4:3‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[e-Portrait‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﺟﻳﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ )]‪ ،([Q‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﺻﻼً‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻳﻥ ]‪ [P‬ﻭ]‪ [Aspect‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪) 4:3‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [Picture Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[ART‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ]‪ [Color Space‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[sRGB‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪89 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﻛﺑﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺧﺔ‬‫ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ]‪(.[YN+RAW‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Edit‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [Image Overlay‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻙ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،3‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻻﻛﺗﺳﺎﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻻﻛﺗﺳﺎﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻻﻛﺗﺳﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ‪ .2.0 – 0.1‬ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪×0.5‬‬‫‪×1.5‬‬‫‪×0.3‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ؛ ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ]‪ [Image Overlay‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺗﻲ )ﻣﺩﺗﻪ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]‪ [R‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(66 .‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Reset Protect‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.q Playback Menu‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ )‪(Connection to Smartphone‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺭ‪" v .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ" )ﺹ‪(123 .‬‬‫‪AR 90‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬‫‪--.--.-- --:-‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪j±0 k±0‬‬‫‪0.5sec‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪W‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪c/# Menu Display‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪X‬‬‫)ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ(‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪) W‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ‪ English‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪) i‬ﺿﺑﻁ‬‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﻥ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‬‫‪) j‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ( ﺃﻭ ‪) k‬ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ( ﻭ ‪GF‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫]‪ [Natural‬ﻭ ]‪.[Vivid‬‬‫‪Rec View‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻭﺭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻔﻳﺩًﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻓﺣﺹ‬‫ﻭﺟﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﺗﻬﺎ ًﺗﻭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻓﺣﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[0.3sec] – [20sec‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Autoq‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‬‫ﻣﻔﻳﺩًﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺣﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪92‬‬‫‪c/#‬‬‫‪Menu‬‬‫‪Display‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻛﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪+1‬‬‫—‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪-2‬‬‫—‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪Vivid‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪112‬‬‫—‬‫‪91 AR‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ )‪(Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ‪ ،(123 .‬ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ]‪ [Private‬ﻭ ]‪ [One-Time‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Connect Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Private‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ :[One-Time‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Select‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Off‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪.[Private‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ(‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Private Password‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.R‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ )ﺹ‪ (64 .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Reset share Order‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬‫ﻳﻬﻲء ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ]‪.[Wi-Fi Settings‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪AR 92‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Reset Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.c Custom Menu‬‬‫‪Custom Menu‬‬‫‪) AF/MF R‬ﺹ‪(93 .‬‬‫‪) Button/Dial/Lever S‬ﺹ‪(94 .‬‬‫‪) Release/j T‬ﺹ‪(94 .‬‬‫‪) Disp/8/PC U‬ﺹ‪(95 .‬‬‫‪) Exp/p/ISO V‬ﺹ‪(96 .‬‬‫‪) Custom # W‬ﺹ‪(97 .‬‬‫‪) K/Color/WB X‬ﺹ‪(98 .‬‬‫‪) Record/Erase Y‬ﺹ‪(99 .‬‬‫‪) Movie Z‬ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬‫‪) Built-In EVF b‬ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬‫‪Custom Menu‬‬‫‪R AF/MF‬‬‫‪S Button/Dial/Lever‬‬‫‪T Release/j‬‬‫‪U Disp/8/PC‬‬‫‪V Exp/p/ISO‬‬‫‪W # Custom‬‬‫‪X K/Color/WB‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪AF Mode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻕ‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪75‬‬‫‪Full-time AF‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫‪.Four Thirds‬‬‫—‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪) K Utility k‬ﺹ‪(101 .‬‬‫‪R AF/MF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪102‬‬‫‪Reset Lens‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻌﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﻻﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪BULB/TIME‬‬‫‪Focusing‬‬‫ﻳﻐﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )‪.(MF‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Focus Ring‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ‪ peaking‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪102‬‬‫‪P Set Home‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻛﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ‪p‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪AF Illuminat.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪I Face Priority‬‬‫‪AF Area Pointer‬‬‫‪C-AF Lock‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [AF Mode‬ﺹ‪ (75 .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[C-AF‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻛﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺟﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻗﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻛﻲ ﻳﺗﻛﻳﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪55‬‬‫—‬‫—‬‫‪93 AR‬‬‫‪S Button/Dial/Lever‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪Button Function‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫]‪،[RFunction] ،[VFunction] ،[UFunction‬‬‫]‪،[IFunction] ،[ZFunction] ،[YFunction] ،[tFunction‬‬‫]‪،[mFunction] ،[nFunction] ،[GFunction‬‬‫]‪[lFunction] ،[nFunction‬‬‫‪103‬‬‫‪Dial Function‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Dial Direction‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Mode Dial‬‬‫‪Function‬‬‫ﻳﺧﺻﺹ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪ Myset‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪) [Myset1] - [Myset4‬ﺹ‪ (79 .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪t Lever‬‬‫‪Function‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪u+v‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،2‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ AFm‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫‪ jYHDR‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ‪.‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪T Release/j‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪105‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪82 ،52‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪) S-AF‬ﺹ‪ (75 .‬ﻭ ‪C-AF‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(75 .‬‬‫—‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪ [S‬ﻭ ]‪ .[T‬ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ‬‫ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪57‬‬‫‪j Image‬‬‫‪Stabilization‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Half Way Rls‬‬‫‪With IS‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Lens I.S. Priority‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Release Lag-Time‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[Short‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﺻﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪*.‬‬‫—‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪Rls Priority S‬‬‫‪Rls Priority C‬‬‫‪j L fps‬‬‫‪j H fps‬‬‫* ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺩ‬‫ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 94‬‬‫‪U Disp/8/PC‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪HDMI‬‬‫]‪ :[HDMI Out‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ‬‫‪.HDMI‬‬‫]‪ :[HDMI Control‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫‪105‬‬‫‪Video Out‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ )]‪ [NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ([PAL‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪106‬‬‫‪KControl‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live SCP‬ﺹ‪(108 .‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live Guide‬ﺹ‪(28 .‬‬

‫–‬

‫‪‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪Art Menu‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪‬‬

‫–‬

‫‪Scene Menu‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live Control‬ﺹ‪(30 .‬‬‫‪107‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪G/Info Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫]‪ :[q Info‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[LV-Info‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[G Settings‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪،109‬‬‫‪110‬‬‫‪Displayed Grid‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [X] ،[y] ،[x] ،[w‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [x‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Histogram‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫]‪ :[Highlight‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Shadow‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪109‬‬‫‪Mode Guide‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪Live View Boost‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ؛ ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Frame Rate‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [High‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺄﺧﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Art LV Mode‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺳﻠﺱ‪.‬‬‫]‪ [Expand LV Dyn. Range‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-OVF‬‬‫‪Expand LV Dyn.‬‬‫‪Range‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫‪/A/P‬‬‫‪M/S‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫‪SCN‬‬‫—‬‫‪173‬‬‫‪95 AR‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪AR 96‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Flicker reduction‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪ ،[Auto‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [50Hz‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪ [60Hz‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪LV Close Up Mode‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪56‬‬‫‪z Lock‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) Z‬ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ( )ﺹ‪ (10 .‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Peaking Settings‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Backlit LCD‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪.[Hold‬‬‫—‬‫‪Sleep‬‬‫ﺳﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ )ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Auto Power Off‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪) 8‬ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺔ(‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪USB Mode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[0‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ [0] .‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪.M‬‬‫‪http://support.olympus-imaging.com/oc1download/index/‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪V‬‬

‫‪V Exp/p/ISO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪EV Step‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Noise Reduct.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺿﻌﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪42‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪59‬‬‫‪ISO Step‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫—‬‫‪ISO-Auto Set‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Auto‬‬‫ﻟـ ‪.ISO‬‬‫]‪ :[High Limit‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Default‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪ISO-Auto‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.[Auto] ISO‬‬‫]‪ :[P/A/S‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ‪.M‬‬‫ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ISO200‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬‫]‪ :[All‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Metering‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪74‬‬‫‪AEL Metering‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪.(102 .‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪BULB/TIME Timer‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺿﻭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪BULB/TIME‬‬‫‪Monitor‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ .[TIME‬ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Live BULB‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺳﺭﻱ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪Anti-Shock z‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]‪ [Anti-Shock z‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Anti-Shock z‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪.2‬‬‫‪166‬‬‫‪Composite‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ )ﺹ‪.(41 .‬‬‫—‬‫‪Live TIME‬‬‫—‬‫‪W # Custom‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫—‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬

‫‪W‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪110‬‬‫‪# Slow Limit‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪110‬‬‫‪w+F‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻣﺷﻐﻝ[ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪73 ،51‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪Noise Filter‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪97 AR‬‬‫‪X K/Color/WB‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪K Set‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ‬‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﻟﻠﺿﻐﻁ‪.‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬‫)]‪ ([K4] – [K1‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬‫‪ GF‬ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪D Set‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪W SF‬‬‫‪W N‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫‪Y SF‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪AR 98‬‬‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺟﺎﻡ ]‪ [X‬ﻭ]‪.[W‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Xiddle‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[Wmall‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫‪2560×1920‬‬‫‪1280×960‬‬‫‪Xiddle‬‬‫‪Wmall‬‬‫‪72‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪72‬‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Shading Comp.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻁﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻳﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻁﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻣﺭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ )ﺹ‪.(24 .‬‬‫‪58‬‬‫> ‪All‬‬‫]‪ :[All Set‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ‬‫ﻋﺩﺍ ]‪.[CWB‬‬‫]‪ :[All Reset‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ‬‫]‪ [CWB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.0‬‬‫—‬‫‪W Keep Warm‬‬‫‪Color‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ "ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ" ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺗﻭﻫﺟﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪#+WB‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Color Space‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Y Record/Erase‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪Quick Erase‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ D‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺳﻳﺣﺫﻑ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪RAW+JPEG Erase‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫﻩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬‫‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ)ﺹ‪.(33 .‬‬‫]‪ :[JPEG‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[RAW+JPEG‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻠﺗﺎ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺧﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺳﺦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬‫]‪) [All Erase‬ﺹ‪.(78 .‬‬‫‪72‬‬‫‪File Name‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺄﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Reset‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ 100‬ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬‫ﻣﻥ‪ .0001‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Edit Filename‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺟﺯء ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪Pmdd‬‬‫‪sRGB: Pmdd0000.jpg‬‬‫‪mdd‬‬‫‪AdobeRGB: _mdd0000.jpg‬‬‫—‬‫‪Priority Set‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ )]‪ [Yes‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ([No‬ﻟﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪dpi Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Copyright‬‬‫‪*Settings‬‬‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻙ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺻﻝ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 63‬ﺣﺭ ًﻓﺎ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Copyright Info.‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻙ‬‫ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Exif‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Artist Name‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Copyright Name‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺎﻟﻙ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺣﺭﻑ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬‫‪.2‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ]‪ [END‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ‪،2‬‬‫ﻅﻠﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.D‬‬‫‪05/70‬‬‫—‬‫‪Copyright Name‬‬‫‪ABCDE‬‬‫‪! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . /‬‬‫? > = < ; ‪0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 :‬‬‫‪I J K L M N O‬‬‫_ ] [ ‪P Q R S T U V W X Y Z‬‬‫‪a b c d e f g h i j k l m n END‬‬‫} { ‪o p q r s t u v w x y z‬‬‫‪@ A B C D E F G H‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪Y‬‬‫‪Delete‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Cancel‬‬‫* ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺯﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪.[Copyright Settings‬‬‫ﻭﺳﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻧﺕ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪99 AR‬‬‫‪Z Movie‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪nMode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪71‬‬‫‪Movie R‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺻﺎﻣﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪76‬‬‫‪Movie Effect‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪42‬‬‫‪Wind Noise‬‬‫‪Reduction‬‬‫ﺧﻔﺽ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪ Recording Volume‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻠﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪R Volume Limiter‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪b Built-In EVF‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪AR 100‬‬‫‪Z‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬

‫—‬
‫—‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬

‫‪b‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪Built-in EVF Style‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪V Info Settings‬‬‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻅﻠﻳﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [Style 1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Style 2‬ﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬‫]‪.[Built-in EVF Style‬‬‫—‬‫‪V Displayed Grid‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ]‪ [w‬ﻭ]‪ [x‬ﻭ]‪ [y‬ﻭ]‪[X‬‬‫ﻭ]‪ .[x‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [Style 1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Style 2‬ﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬‫]‪.[Built-in EVF Style‬‬‫—‬‫‪EVF Auto Switch‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻳﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪EVF Adjust‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻭﺗﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬‫]‪ [EVF Auto Luminance‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[On‬‬‫—‬‫‪V Half Way Level‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ً‬‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [Built-in EVF Style‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪ [Style 1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Style 2‬‬‫—‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Pixel Mapping‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻭﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪145‬‬‫‪Exposure Shift‬‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪.(51 .‬‬‫—‬‫‪AF Focus Adj.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻁﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ±20‬ﺧﻁﻭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪110‬‬‫‪: Warning‬‬‫‪Level‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ‪.:‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪: Battery‬‬‫‪Priority‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪133‬‬‫‪Level Adjust‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Reset‬ﻳﻌﻳﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Adjust‬ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ‪.0‬‬‫‪Touch Screen‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫‪*Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ُ .Eye-Fi‬ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫‪Electronic Zoom‬‬‫‪Speed‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬

‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪130‬‬‫* ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ .[Eye-Fi‬ﻻ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫"ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪k K Utility‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪101 AR‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫]‪[AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪S-AF AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ‬‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ‪ AEL/AFL‬ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪AEL/S-AF‬‬‫‪Exposure‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪Half Way‬‬‫‪Fully‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪AFL‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻁ ﻛﻠﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫ﺑﺩء ‪C-AF‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫ﺑﺩء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬

‫–‬

‫–‬
‫–‬

‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫ﺑﺩء ‪C-AF‬‬‫‪mode4‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﺑﺩء ‪C-AF‬‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫‪mode2‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫]‪[MF Assist‬‬‫ﻫﻲ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪ .MF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Magnify‬‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﺭ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) [AF Area] v .‬ﺹ‪(54 .‬‬‫‪Peaking‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Peaking Settings] v‬ﺹ‪(96 .‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [Magnify‬ﻭ ]‪ [Peaking‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ‬‫ﺑﺈﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪) [Button Function‬ﺹ‪.(103 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪ Peaking‬ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺳﻥ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻟﻳﺱ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 102‬‬‫‪Button Function‬‬‫]‪[Button Function‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺳﻧﺎﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻸﺧﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫]‪/ [ZFunction] / [YFunction] / [tFunction] / 1*[RFunction] / [VFunction] / [UFunction‬‬‫]‪/ 4*[mFunction] / (3*[P] / 2*[Direct Function]) / [nFunction] / [GFunction] / [IFunction‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫]‪*[lFunction] / 4*[nFunction‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻳﻌﻳّﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ‪.HIGF‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪.HLD-7‬‬‫*‪ 5‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬‫]‪ .[AEL/AFL‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ،AEL‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ‬‫‪ u‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪R REC‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪) z‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ(‬‫ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[On‬‬‫ﻟـ ]‪ [z Lock‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻅﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪) k‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ )ﺹ‪.(59 .‬‬‫‪(AF Area) P‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪P Home‬‬‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ‬‫ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪) [P Set Home‬ﺹ‪ .(93 .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺳﺎﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪RAWK‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫‪Test Picture‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Myset1 – Myset4‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Myset‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪I/H‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ H‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ‬‫‪ FL-LM2‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻟﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺯﻭﻡ ﺁﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ H‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Live Guide‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪F‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪103 AR‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪AR 104‬‬‫‪) b‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻭﻧﻔﺭﺗﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪) D‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪) D] v .‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ([‬‫)ﺹ‪(173 .‬‬‫‪) a‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Peaking‬‬‫ﻛﻝ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪/‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬‫‪ ،Peaking‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪AF Stop‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣ َُﻭ ﱢﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ‪ HDR‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪BKT‬‬‫ﻳﺷ ّﻐﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ BKT‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Multi Function‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ*‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪) G‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪Electric Zoom‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫* ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪) b :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ(‪،(Magnify) a ،(Color Creator) c ،‬‬‫‪) d‬ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬‫‪t Lever Function‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫]‪[t Lever Function‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬‫‪Off‬‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫]‪.[Dial Function‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ISO :‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫]‪.[Dial Function‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ISO :‬‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪ISO :R‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ [RFunction‬ﻭ ]‪ .[VFunction‬ﺯﺭ ‪ :Fn2‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫‪mode4‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪ :R‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ [RFunction‬ﻭ ]‪ .[VFunction‬ﺯﺭ ‪ISO :Fn2‬‬‫‪mode5‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩﺓ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪،2‬‬‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻭ ]‪.[MF‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺻّﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬‫)‪ (HD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ،AV‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ [Video Out‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ‪.(95 .‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ‪(CB-HD1 :‬‬‫)ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪(.‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪(D‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪A‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪1‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪2‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪) AV‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ‪(CB-AVC3 :‬‬‫)ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫)ﺃﺻﻔﺭ( ﻭﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )ﺃﺑﻳﺽ(‪(.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬‫‪105 AR‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ q‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ(‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺻﻭﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ AV‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳ ًﻘﺎ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪1080i‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ‪.1080i HDMI‬‬‫‪720p‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺝ ‪.720p HDMI‬‬‫‪480p/576p‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ‪ .480p/576p HDMI‬ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ 576p‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [PAL‬ﻟـ ]‪) [Video Out‬ﺹ‪.(95 .‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺧﺭﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪.USB‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪AR 106‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫‪) [HDMI] v .HDMI‬ﺹ‪(95 .‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ "‪،"Red‬‬‫ﻭﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ "‪."Green‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ )‪(KControl Settings‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪u‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺹ‪(108 .‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪P/A/S/M‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺹ‪(108 .‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ART/SCN‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺹ‪(108 .‬‬‫‪107 AR‬‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺗﻠﻙ ﻫﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬

‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪c ba‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪e d‬‬‫‪f‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪52 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪73 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ................‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫‪ 7‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ‪ ................................N‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ‪ ..........................................J‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ ‪ .........................................T‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪ ..................................z‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ‪ ......................x‬ﺹ‪80 .‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ......................... y‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪98 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪103 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪55 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪74 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪75 .‬‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ART‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .SCN‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪AR 108‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )‪(G/Info Settings‬‬‫‪) LV-Info‬ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ]‪ [LV-Info‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ‬‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪) [Histogram Settings] v .‬ﺹ‪(95 .‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ‬‫‪Shadow Highlight‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‬‫ﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺟﻧﺑًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻧﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Fn1‬ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫‪ HIGF‬ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Fn1‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪Fn1‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪) q Info‬ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ]‪ [q Info‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Fn1‬‬‫‪54‬‬‫‪53‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪109 AR‬‬‫‪) G Settings‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ .[G Settings‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪p‬‬

‫‪Q‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪2013.10‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪ 100–9‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪10‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ]‪[# Slow Limit] [# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪A‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪M‬‬

‫ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻣﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺑﻁﺄ ﻣﻥ ‪)/1‬ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ×‪ (2‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪[# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪[# Slow Limit‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪*[# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺣﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ‬‫* ‪ 1/320‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ‪ ،FL-LM2‬ﻭ ‪ 1/125‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻁﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ±20‬ﺧﻁﻭﺓ )–‪ :‬ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ‪ :+ ،‬ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ(‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻻ‬‫ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [AF Focus Adj.‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ k‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ c‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪:[Off‬‬‫]‪ :[Default Data‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ؛ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ‪ 20‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ‪.‬‬‫]‪:[Lens Data‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Default Data‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪AR 110‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Q‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Lens Data‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Create Lens Data Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ .[Lens Data‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫• ﻛﺭﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ؛ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Q‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ c‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Lens Data‬ﻓﻲ‬‫]‪ [AF Focus Adj.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ ،k‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫• ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪111 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ‬‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ]‪ [c/# Menu Display‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.(Setup Menu) d‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [c/# Menu Display‬ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [# Menu Display‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[On‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ (Accessory Port Menu) #‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Accessory Port Menu‬‬‫‪) OLYMPUS PENPAL Share A‬ﺹ‪(114 .‬‬‫‪) OLYMPUS PENPAL Album B‬ﺹ‪(115 .‬‬‫‪) Electronic Viewfinder C‬ﺹ‪(115 .‬‬‫‪Accessory Port Menu‬‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL Album‬‬‫‪Electronic Viewfinder‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪c‬‬
‫‪#‬‬

‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪AR 112‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑـ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Send A Picture‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Search‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ]‪[Address Book‬‬‫ﻭﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫<‬‫‪Send A Picture‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Send Picture‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،PIN‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ‪ 0000‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Sending‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪/‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺿﻳﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪.JPEG‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪) Accessory Port Menu #‬ﺹ‪.(112 .‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Please Wait‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ‬‫]‪.[Receive Picture Request‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Accept‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،PIN‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ‪ 0000‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Accessory Port Menu‬‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL Album‬‬‫‪Electronic Viewfinder‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪c‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Receive Picture‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ(‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪.Q‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪Receiving‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫‪113 AR‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟـ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻟﻠﻣﺿﻳﻔﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪) Accessory Port Menu #‬ﺹ‪.(112 .‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Address Book‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪A. OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬‫‪Please Wait‬‬‫‪Address Book‬‬‫‪My OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪Picture Send Size‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Address List‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﻔﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﻔﻳﻥ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﻑ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ(‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻭﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫<‬‫‪Send A Picture‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [z‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ‬‫]‪ [y‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺍﺋﺢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﻟﻌﻘﻭﺑﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪A OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬

‫‪#‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Please Wait‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺿﻳﻔﻳﻥ ﻟﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪113‬‬‫‪Address Book‬‬‫]‪ :[Address List‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﻔﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻳﻥ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[New Pairing‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺿﻳﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻓﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Search Timer‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺿﻳﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪My OLYMPUS‬‬‫‪PENPAL‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪Picture Send Size‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 1: Small‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﻳﻛﺎﻓﺊ ‪.640 × 480‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 2: Large‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﻳﻛﺎﻓﺊ ‪.1920 × 1440‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 3: Medium‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﻳﻛﺎﻓﺊ ‪.1280 × 960‬‬‫‪113‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪AR 114‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪B OLYMPUS PENPAL Album‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪#‬‬

‫‪B‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Copy All‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﺳﺦ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭ ‪.OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪Reset Protect‬‬‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ‪.OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪Album Mem. Usage‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[Size 2: Medium‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪Album Mem. Setup‬‬‫]‪ :[All Erase‬ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Format Album‬ﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪Picture Copy Size‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 1: Small‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﻳﻛﺎﻓﺊ ‪.640 × 480‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 2: Large‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﻳﻛﺎﻓﺊ ‪.1920 × 1440‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪C Electronic Viewfinder‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬

‫‪#‬‬

‫‪C‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪EVF Adjust‬‬‫ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻟـ‬‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪HI‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )‪ (j‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬‫)‪ (k‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻼﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺗﻳﻥ ]‪ [+7‬ﻭ ]‪.[–7‬‬‫—‬‫‪EVF Auto Switch‬‬‫ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪.VF-4‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻓﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪،[On‬‬‫ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ VF-4‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪138‬‬‫‪EVF Adjust‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪+2‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪-5‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪115 AR‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ "ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ" ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﺿﺣً ﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ .DPOF‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]<[‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]<[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ [U‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻛﺣﺟﺯ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Print Order Setting‬‬‫<‬‫‪ALL‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [U‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬

‫‪8‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫‪No‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺫﻑ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺟﻭﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪AR 116‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]<[‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]<[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Keep‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ G‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺟﻭﺯﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ )‪(PictBridge‬‬‫ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪USB‬‬‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪USB‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻁﺎﻟﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺿﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (96 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪.[Print‬‬‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺭ‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪USB‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ ،[One Moment‬ﻣﺗﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺻﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫‪Storage‬‬‫‪MTP‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(118 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪117 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪.USB‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬‫‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Easy Print Start‬‬‫‪PC/Custom Print‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪AR 118‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪All Print‬‬‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Multi Print‬‬‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪All Index‬‬‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺃﺟﺭﻳﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺟﺯ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻼ‬‫ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Size‬‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺩﻋﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Borderless‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬‫‪Pics/Sheet‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬‫]‪.[Multi Print‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ )ﺣﺟﺯ‬‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪123-3456‬‬‫‪2013.10.01 12:30‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪Single Print‬‬‫‪More‬‬‫‪Select‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫)‪Print (f‬‬‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺯ‬‫]‪ [Single Print‬ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺟﻭﺯﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫‪Single Print‬‬‫)‪(t‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺣﺟﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ]‪ ،[Single Print‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫)‪More (u‬‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [All Print‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[Option Set‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪File Name‬‬‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺷﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺫﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ ،[Print‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[Continue‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫>×‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ]‪ [Cancel‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ؛ ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.MENU‬‬‫‪119 AR‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬‫‪Windows ‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‪.‬‬‫‪Windows XP‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ "ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ"‪.‬‬‫‪Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Vista‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ‬‫"‪ "OLYMPUS Setup‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ "ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ"‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪9‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ "ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ"‪ ،‬ﻓﺣﺩﺩ "ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ" )‪ (Windows XP‬ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ"‬‫)‪ (Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7 /Windows Vista‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ "ﺍﺑﺩﺃ"‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ )ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ (OLYMPUS‬ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ "ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ "OLYMPUS‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ‬‫"‪."LAUNCHER.EXE‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ "ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ "ﻧﻌﻡ" ﺃﻭ "ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ"‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺭ‬‫ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪USB‬‬‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪USB‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ ،USB‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻁﺎﻟﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[Storage‬‬‫‪AR 120‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺳﺟﱢ ﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ "ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ" ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ "‪ "OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪) Windows XP‬ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺙ(‪/Windows Vista/‬‬‫‪Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬‫‪ Pentium 4‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ 1.3‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‬‫)ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Core2Duo‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ 2.13‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ 768 × 1024‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬‫‪ 65,536‬ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ )ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪ 16,770,000‬ﻟﻭﻥ(‬‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪Macintosh ‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ "‪ "OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪ Mac OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪–10.5‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪10.9‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬‫‪ Duo/Intel Core Solo‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ 1.5‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‬‫)ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Core2Duo‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ 768 × 1024‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬‫‪ 32,000‬ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ )ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪ 16,770,000‬ﻟﻭﻥ(‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ "ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ" ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ "ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ"‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪121 AR‬‬‫ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﺋﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ‪ .USB Mass Storage Class‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻥ‬‫ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪:USB‬‬‫‪:Windows‬‬‫‪:Macintosh‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪/Windows 7 SP1/Windows Vista SP2/Windows XP SP3‬‬‫‪Windows 8.1/Windows 8‬‬‫‪ Mac OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪–10.5‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪10.9‬‬‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪USB‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ .[Storage‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Storage‬‬‫‪MTP‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪AR 122‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Windows Photo Gallery‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Windows 7‬ﺃﻭ‬‫‪ Windows 8‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Windows 8.1‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [MTP‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.3‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺟﻬﺯﺍ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻪ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬‫• ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [0‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪[USB Mode‬‬‫)ﺹ‪ (96 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Olympus‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪."OLYMPUS Image Share (OI.Share)" ،‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ "ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(157 .‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻥ‬‫ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﺑﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺭﺍﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،"OI.Share" ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪One-Time‬‬‫ﻳﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﺩﻗﺎء‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ‪" v .‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ )‪"(Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(92 .‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )‪ ،(SSID‬ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ‪ QR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )‪ (SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ‪ ،QR‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )‪ (SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻻﺗﺻﺎﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪.OI.Share‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪Private‬‬‫ﻳﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ‬‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪123 AR‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )‪ ،(SSID‬ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ‪ QR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )‪ (SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ‪ ،QR‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )‪ (SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻻﺗﺻﺎﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ MENU‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪ [Stop‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ‪ OI.Share‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ‬‫ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﻳﺩﻳﻙ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﻛﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺳﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺷﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﺫ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺻﻌﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻟﺩ ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺳﺎﻛﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪AR 124‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪OI.Share‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫• ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ]‪.[Private‬‬‫ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪.OI.Share‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪ g‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﺿﻳﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺳﻭﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ‪.GPS‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ]‪ [Share Order‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ]‪.[Connection to Smartphone‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪.[Private‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪.ART/A/M/S/A/P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Share Order‬ﺹ‪.(64 .‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪125 AR‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ .Olympus‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺳﺗﻬﻠﻙ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺯﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻫﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﺧﺻﻳﺻًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ‬‫ﺧﺻﻳﺻًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻭﻉ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫"ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(156 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ AC-3‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺣﻥ )‪ .(HLD-7‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪AR 126‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ ‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 240‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫)‪ 50/60‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ( ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﺣﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺧﺗﻠ ًﻔﺎ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﻟﻳﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺳﺭ ﻋﻥ‬‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻲ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺧﻠﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﻛﻠﻣﺔ "ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ"‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪) SD‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،SDXC ،SDHC ،SD :‬ﻭ‬‫‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ "‪ ،"LOCK‬ﻟﻥ‬‫ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪LOCK‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺭﻫﺎ‬‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﻟﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ‬‫ﺑﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪) [Eye-Fi] v .‬ﺹ‪(101 .‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻁء ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪127 AR‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺣﺟﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ‪.4:3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪AR 128‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪YSF‬‬‫‪YF‬‬‫‪YN‬‬‫‪YB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬‫)‪(Pixel Count‬‬‫‪3456×4608‬‬‫‪2400×3200‬‬‫‪1920×2560‬‬‫‪1440×1920‬‬‫‪1200×1600‬‬‫‪960×1280‬‬‫‪768×1024‬‬‫‪480×640‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﺿﻐﻁ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬‫‪ORF‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬‫)ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ(‬‫‪ 17‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 11‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 7.5‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.5‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 2.4‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 5.6‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.4‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.7‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.2‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.2‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 2.2‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.1‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.8‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.8‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.3‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.7‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.3‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.6‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.6‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.1‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ*‬‫‪41‬‬‫‪79‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪248‬‬‫‪369‬‬‫‪155‬‬‫‪257‬‬‫‪508‬‬‫‪753‬‬‫‪271‬‬‫‪398‬‬‫‪782‬‬‫‪1151‬‬‫‪476‬‬‫‪701‬‬‫‪1356‬‬‫‪1968‬‬‫‪678‬‬‫‪984‬‬‫‪1906‬‬‫‪2653‬‬‫‪1034‬‬‫‪1488‬‬‫‪2773‬‬‫‪3813‬‬‫‪1564‬‬‫‪2260‬‬‫‪4068‬‬‫‪5547‬‬‫‪3589‬‬‫‪5085‬‬‫‪7627‬‬‫‪10170‬‬‫*ﺑﺎﻓﺗﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ‪ -‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺣﺟﻭﺯﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ‪ -‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ‬‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﺑﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 9999‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﻭﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Four Thirds‬ﻭﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.OM‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺟﻬًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ‬‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﺷﺗﻌﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ‬‫ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺑّﺕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺛﺑّﺗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬‫‪ 1‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺟﺭﻯ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫‪ 4‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬‫‪ 7‬ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬‫‪ 8‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪) UNLOCK‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﺣﺏ(‬‫‪ 9‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺯﺧﺭﻓﻳﻪ )ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﻠﻧﺳﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬‫‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) *L-Fn‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫‪11‬‬‫* ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫]‪[lFunction] < [Button Function‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(103 .‬‬‫)‪(ED 12-40mm F2.8 PRO‬‬‫‪129 AR‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺁﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ )‪(ED12-50mm f3.5-6.3EZ‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪MACRO‬‬‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫‪+‬‬‫‪MACRO‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫‪) E-ZOOM‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺁﻟﻲ(‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪) M-ZOOM‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪) MACRO‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ(‬‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ 0.2‬ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 0.5‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MACRO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ L-Fn‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬‫)‪) ED12mm f2.0 ،17mm f1.8‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ(‪(ED12-40mm f2.8PRO ،‬‬‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪ ،MF‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬‫‪AF/MF‬‬‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪AR 130‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F5.6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ 17mm f1.8‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ED12mm f2.0‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻛﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﻠﻧﺳﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪(BCL-0980 Fisheye ،BCL-1580‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ‪ MF‬ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻭﻏﻠﻕ ﺣﺎﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻻﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ‪ ،(68 .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ 9‬ﻣﻡ )ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ ‪ (BCL-0980‬ﺃﻭ‬‫‪ 15‬ﻣﻡ )‪.(BCL-1580‬‬‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺎﺟﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﻌﻳﺩ‬‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪MF‬‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪OM‬‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻡ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻡ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻡ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻡ*‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻧﻌﻡ‬

‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬‫ﻻ‬‫ﻧﻌﻡ*‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫*‪ 1‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [C-AF+TR‬ﻓﻲ ]‪ .[AF mode‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪131 AR‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬‫‪ED12-40mm‬‬‫‪f2.8PRO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫‪ 40 – 12‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪f/2.8‬‬‫‪f/4.0 – 5.6‬‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫‪30.3° – 84.1°‬‬‫‪8.2° – 30.3°‬‬‫‪8.2° – 75°‬‬‫ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 14‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 10‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 13‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 11‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 15‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺯﺣﻳﺔ‬‫‪f/2.8 – 22‬‬‫‪f/4.0 – 22‬‬‫‪f/4.0 – 22‬‬‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫)ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ(‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﻡ – )‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﻡ – )‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﻡ – )‬‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ‪AF/MF‬‬‫‪ ،AF/MF‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻧﺳﻭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء(‬‫‪ 382‬ﺟﻡ‬‫‪ 190‬ﺟﻡ‬‫‪ 260‬ﺟﻡ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫)ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺭ × ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ(‬‫‪ 84×l69.9‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 83×l63.5‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 83×l63.5‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫ﻗﻁﺭ ﻣﺟﺭﻯ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬‫‪ 62‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 58‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 58‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ*‬‫‪LH-61D‬‬‫‪LH-61C‬‬‫‪ED12-50mm‬‬‫‪f3.5-6.3EZ‬‬‫‪17mm f1.8‬‬‫‪BCL-1580‬‬‫)‪(15mm f8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫‪ 150 – 40‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫‪ 50 – 12‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 17‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 15‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪f/3.5 – 6.3‬‬‫‪f/1.8‬‬‫‪f/8‬‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫‪24° – 84°‬‬‫‪64°‬‬‫‪72°‬‬‫ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 10‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺯﺣﻳﺔ‬‫‪f/3.5 – 22‬‬‫‪f/1.8 – 22‬‬‫ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪f/8‬‬‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫)ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ(‬‫‪ 0.35‬ﻡ – )‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﻡ – ‪ 0.5‬ﻡ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ(‬‫‪ 0.25‬ﻡ – )‬‫‪ 0.30‬ﻡ – )‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ‪AF/MF‬‬‫‪ ،AF/MF‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬‫‪MF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻧﺳﻭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء(‬‫‪ 212‬ﺟﻡ‬‫‪ 120‬ﺟﻡ‬‫‪ 22‬ﺟﻡ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫)ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺭ × ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ(‬‫‪ 83×l57‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 35.5×l57.5‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 9×l56‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫ﻗﻁﺭ ﻣﺟﺭﻯ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬‫‪ 52‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 46‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫–‬‫ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪LH-55B‬‬‫‪LH-48B‬‬‫–‬‫*ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ ،ED12-40mm‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺳﻣﻳﻙ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 132‬‬‫‪ 150 – 14‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪f/4.0 – 5.6‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪ED40-150mm‬‬‫‪f4.0-5.6R‬‬‫‪ED14-150mm‬‬‫‪f4.0-5.6‬‬

‫‪12‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(HLD-7‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ .Fn‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ )ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.HLD-7‬‬‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪B-Fn2‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪B-Fn1‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪HLD-7‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺯﻉ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (a‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .HLD-7‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،HLD-7‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.HLD-7‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .BLN-1‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ‬‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬‫‪133 AR‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬‫ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺯﺭ ‪ B-Fn‬ﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ HLD-7‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ [Button Function‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ c‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪) "Button Function" v .‬ﺹ‪(103 .‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ )‪(HLD-7‬‬‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺁﻳﻭﻥ ‪1 × BLN-1‬‬‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪AC-3‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 128.5‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﺭﺽ( × ‪ 48.2‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 57.3‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﻣﻕ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 235‬ﺟﺭﺍﻣًﺎ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ(‬‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺵ‬‫)ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪) IEC 529 IPX1‬ﺗﺣﺕ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬‫‪(OLYMPUS‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻣﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺿﺭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻅﺎﻓﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻣﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻣﺑﺗﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺭﻗﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪AR 134‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺗﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﺟﺎﺗﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ TTL-AUTO‬ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪ .Super FP‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ )ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ(‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺛﺎﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻫﻭ ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫‪) GN‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ( )‪(ISO100‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ‬‫‪،MANUAL ،AUTO ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪ 85) GN36‬ﻣﻠﻡ*( ‪ 24) GN20‬ﻣﻠﻡ*(‬‫‪FL-600R‬‬‫‪FP MANUAL ،FP TTL AUTO‬‬‫‪ 28) GN20‬ﻣﻠﻡ*(‬‫‪MANUAL ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪FL-300R‬‬‫‪ 28) GN14 MANUAL ،AUTO ،TTL-AUTO‬ﻣﻠﻡ*(‬‫‪FL-14‬‬‫‪GN11‬‬‫‪RF-11‬‬‫‪MANUAL ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪GN22‬‬‫‪TF-22‬‬‫* ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ )ﻳﺣﺳﺏ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻡ(‪.‬‬‫‪RC mode‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﻩ‬‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫• ﺷﻐﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ MODE‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪ [# RC Mode‬ﻓﻲ ‪) X Shooting Menu 2‬ﺹ‪.(78 .‬‬‫• ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﻻﺣﻅ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(RC‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Super FP‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Super FP‬‬‫‪A Mode‬‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬‫• ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [HI‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [MID‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[LO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‬‫• ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪LO‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Ch‬‬‫‪+5.0‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫–‬‫‪+3.0‬‬‫‪TTL‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪TTL‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻋﺩﻝ‬‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟـ‬‫‪ ،MANUAL‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺩﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ RC‬ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪135 AR‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‬‫ﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺩﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪30°‬‬‫‪30°‬‬‫‪60°‬‬‫‪7m‬‬‫‪50°‬‬‫‪50°‬‬‫‪5m‬‬‫‪100°‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ‬‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ٍ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻭﻣﺿﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬‫)ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺧﺭﺝ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺷﺗﺕ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﻭ ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪AR 136‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‬‫• ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪ 250‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ X‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ Olympus‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻻﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻼ ًﺷﺎ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺋﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪(MMF-2/MMF-3) Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ Four Thirds‬ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ .Four Thirds‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺃﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Micro Four Thirds‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺿﻳﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ُﺑﻌﺩ )‪(RM-UC1‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﺑﺳﻁ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻸﺿﻭﺍء‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌُﺩ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ ﺳﻬﻝ ﻭﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺭﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ f) SCN‬ﺃﻭ ‪ w‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(m‬‬‫ﺿﻭء ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ )‪(MAL-1‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ )‪(SEMA-1‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻧﻭﺻﻳﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪) .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ‬‫ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪ l3.5‬ﻣﻠﻡ(‬‫ﻓﻧﺟﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ )‪(EP-13‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺑﻔﻧﺟﺎﻥ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪137 AR‬‬‫ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪BLN-1‬‬‫‪BCN-1‬‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫‪HLD-7‬‬‫‪AC-3‬‬‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫‪EP-13‬‬‫‪VF-4/VF-3‬‬‫ﻛﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬‫‪RM-UC1‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪AR 138‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪/USB‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪/AV‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬‫ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ‪ /‬ﺣﺯﺍﻡ‬‫ﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﻛﺗﻑ‬‫ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬‫ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL PP-1‬‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ*‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪/SDHC/SD‬‬‫‪Eye-Fi/SDXC‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬‫*‪3‬‬‫‪SEMA-1‬‬‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬‫‪MAL-1‬‬‫‪OLYMPUS Viewer‬‬‫ﺿﻭء ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ‬‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻣﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.OM‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻣﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ :‬ﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪E-M1‬‬‫‪ :‬ﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻠﻳﺔ*‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12mm f2.0‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f1.8‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 25mm f1.8‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 45mm f1.8‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 60mm f2.8 Macro‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 75mm f1.8‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 9-18mm f4.0-5.6‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-40mm f2.8 PRO‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-50mm f3.5-6.3 EZ‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED14-42mm f3.5-5.6 EZ‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 14-42mm f3.5-5.6 II R‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-150mm f4.0-5.6‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 40-150mm f4.0-5.6 R‬‬‫‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 75-300mm f4.8-6.7 II‬‬‫‪* MMF-3/MMF-2‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪FCON-P01‬‬‫ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ‬‫‪WCON-P01‬‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺭﻳﺿﺔ‬‫‪MCON-P01‬‬‫ﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ‬‫‪MCON-P02‬‬‫ﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫‪Four Thirds‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫‪* MF-2‬‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪OM‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪2 OM‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪FL-14‬‬‫‪FL-600R‬‬‫‪FL-300R‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬‫‪SRF-11‬‬‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬‫‪*RF-11‬‬‫‪STF-22‬‬‫‪* TF-22‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬‫‪FC-1‬‬‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ‬‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫‪12‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺿﻊ‬‫ﻟﻌﻘﻭﺑﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﻟﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪139 AR‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻛﺗﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺩ‬‫• ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻓﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺑﻙ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬‫• ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺯﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪[Sleep] v .‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(96 .‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ )‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ #‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺳﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪13‬‬‫ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺛﺑﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬‫ﺗﺿﺎء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺛﺑﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻻ‬‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺑﺎﻳﻧﺔ‬‫‪AR 140‬‬‫ﺿﻭء ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ‬‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻻ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬‫ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﻟﻳﺱ ﺑﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ ﻭﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﻌﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [.Noise Reduct‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪) [Noise Reduct.] v‬ﺹ‪(96 .‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ‬‫]‪ .[Digital Tele-converter‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ‪ 37‬ﻫﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻭﻗﺕ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﻬﺎ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪" v .‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ"‬‫)ﺹ‪(17 .‬‬‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫• ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻳﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﻬﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،M‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻁﺭﺃﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺑﻪ ﺿﻭء ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻁﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺧﺫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء ﻗﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ‬‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻳﺩﻙ ﻟﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ" )ﺹ‪(129 .‬‬‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ( ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬‫ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﺑﻕ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪:‬‬‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ]‪ [T‬ﻭ]‪ ،[.Noise Reduct‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ )ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ( ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ]‪.[Pixel Mapping‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪ - Pixel Mapping" v .‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ" )ﺹ‪(145 .‬‬‫‪141 AR‬‬‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ‬‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻲ‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Card‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ "‪ ."LOCK‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(127 .‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Card Error‬‬‫‪Write Protect‬‬‫‪Card Full‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Clean the contact area of‬‬‫‪the card with a dry cloth.‬‬‫‪Clean Card‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ ،[Clean Card‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺍﻏﻠﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ‬‫ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ ،[Yes][Format‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪Q‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Picture‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪Picture Error‬‬‫‪AR 142‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻠﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺩ ﺃﺻﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫‪ The Image Cannot‬ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪Be Edited‬‬‫‪Picture Error‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺑﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻣًﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ‬‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Internal camera‬‬‫‪temperature is too‬‬‫‪high. Please wait‬‬‫‪for cooling before‬‬‫‪camera use.‬‬‫‪Battery Empty‬‬‫‪No Connection‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻲ‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﻟﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﻟﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺯﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺧﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Paper‬‬‫ﻧﻔﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Ink‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺣﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺷﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Jammed‬‬‫‪Print Error‬‬‫‪Cannot Print‬‬‫‪The lens is locked.‬‬‫‪Please extend the‬‬‫‪lens.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﺣﺏ ﺗﺑﻘﻰ‬‫ﻣﺿﻣﻭﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(14 .‬‬‫‪Please check the‬‬‫‪status of a lens.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷ ّﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪Settings Changed‬‬‫‪143 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ‬‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺳﺎﺥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻏﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﺑﺻﺎﺑﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ ﻭﺍﻋﺻﺭﻫﺎ‬‫ﺟﻳﺩًﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺟﻔﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻗﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻁﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻏﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻋﺻﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﻳﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺑﻌﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺧﺗﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺑّﺕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺛﺑّﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬‫ﻏﻁﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺷﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺗﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻹﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻱ ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪AR 144‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺂﻛﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻔﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺭﻛﺕ ﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪ - Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﻲ ‪) Custom Menu c‬ﺹ‪ (101 .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.k‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ I‬ﺛﻡ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ]‪ [Busy‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪،‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪145 AR‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬.[Myset] ‫ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬:1*.[Reset] ‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬Full] ‫ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬:2*.[Reset] ‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬Basic] ‫ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬:3*

K Shooting Menu
v

3*

78
79
70

2*

1*



‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬

―
―




‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬

Card Setup
Reset/Myset

jNatural
YN
X

Picture Mode
Still Picture
Movie

72







71







4:3

Image Aspect

86







Off

Digital Tele-converter

86





Off

Keystone Comp.

57







o

j/Y







S-I.S. Auto

Still Picture







M-I.S. On

Movie

Off
3f 1.0EV

AE BKT

68
82
83
83
83
83
60
84





















135







K

X

Image Stabilizer
Bracketing

A–B
WB BKT
G–M
FL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT

―
―
―
―
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
99
00:00:01
00:00:01
Off
Off

HDR
Frame
Auto Gain
Overlay

Multiple Exposure
Time Lapse Settings

Frame
Start Waiting TimeInterval TimeTime Lapse Movie

13‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬85‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬W# RC Mode

AR 146

q Playback Menu
v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬









All

Slide




3 sec
Short

Slide IntervalMovie Interval

―
67

88



Start
Joy

BGM

On



―
―
―
―
―
―
―

88
89
90
90
116
90
90

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬q‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬m

R
RAW Data Edit
JPEG Edit
R

Sel. Image

Edit

Image Overlay
Print Order
Reset Protect
Connection to Smartphoned Setup Menu
v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬――
،k ±0 ،j ±0
Natural
0.5 sec

17
91
91



91



―
―
―

13
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬147 AR

91
91

X
*W

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬di
Rec View

Wi-Fi Connect
Settings
Private Password
Wi-Fi Settings
Reset share
Order
Reset Wi-Fi
Settings
On c Menu Display
c/# Menu Display
Off # Menu Display
FirmwarePrivate91‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬―.‫* ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‬c Custom Menu
v

93

3*

2*

1*











































*#

I Face Priority
AF Area Pointer
C-AF Lock
Button/Dial/Lever S
UFunction
VFunction
RFunction
tFunction
YFunction
ZFunction
ButtonFunction
IFunction

P

GFunctionnFunction

K
On
Off
P
Multi Function
RREC
AEL/AFL
k



z

*j/Y
AEL/AFL










Ps/F
FNo./F
Shutter/F
Shutter/FNo.
HI/GF
Prev/Next/G/U
Dial1
Exposure
Dial1
Ps
Off
mode1
Off

mFunctionnFunctionlFunction
P
A
S
M
Menu

13
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬P
AF Stop94



AEL/AFLP Set HomeAF Illuminat.



AF ModeFull-time AF

o
On





Still Picture
Movie







S-AF
C–AF
Off
S-AF
C-AF
MF
On
On

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬AF/MF R c

b
Off
Off





mode1
mode2
mode1

‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬Reset Lens
BULB/TIME Focusing
Focus Ring
Magnify
MF Assist
Peaking‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬Dial
Functionq
Dial Direction
Mode Dial Function
t Lever Function
u+v[Direct Function] ‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬nFunction] ‫* ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬AR 148

v

94

3*

2*

1*



































‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬Release/j T c
Rls Priority S
Rls Priority C‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
Off
On
6 fps
10 fps
Off
On
OffNormalj L fpsj H fpsj Image Stabilization
Half Way Rls With IS
Lens I.S. Priority
Release Lag-Time
Disp/8/PC U






95


























13
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬149 AR

96































1080i
Off
—
Live Guide
Live Control
Art Menu
Scene Menu
Overall ،Image Only،u ،Image Only
Level Gauge
Calendar ،O
Off‫ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ‬
255
0
On
Off
Normal
mode1
On
Auto
mode2
Off
White
Hold
1 min
4h
On
Auto

HDMI OutHDMI Control

HDMI
Video Out

iAUTO
P/A/S/M KControl
Settings
ART
SCN
q Info
LV-Info

G/InfoSettings

G Settings
Displayed Grid
Picture Mode Settings
Highlight Histogram
Settings
Shadow
Mode Guide
Live View Boost
Frame Rate
Art LV Mode
Expand LV Dyn. Range
Flicker reduction
LV Close Up Modez LockPeaking Settings
Backlit LCD
Sleep
Auto Power Off
8
USB Mode

v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬

96






















































1/3EV
Auto
Standard
Auto
1/3EV
High Limit: 1600
Default: 200
P/A/S
p
Auto
8 min
-7
Off
0.5 sec
Off
1 sec













1/320
1/60
Off







،K3 XN ،K2 YN ،K1 YF
K4 WN

97







97

98
















































0 : G ،0 : A——

2560×1920
1280×960
Off
Auto

On
WB AutosRGB
OffRAW+JPEG
Reset
Off
No
350dpi
Off
—
—

100









P
On
On

ISO-Auto Set
ISO-Auto
Metering
AEL Metering
BULB/TIME Timer
BULB/TIME Monitor
Live BULB
Live TIME
Anti-Shock z
Composite Settings# Custom W# X-Sync.
# Slow Limit
w+F
K/Color/WB X
K Set
Xiddle
Pixel
Count
Wmall
Shading Comp.
WB
All SetAll >All Reset
W Keep Warm Color#+WB
Color Space
Record/Erase Y
Quick Erase
RAW+JPEG Erase
File Name
Edit Filename
Priority Set
dpi Settings
Copyright Info.
Copyright
Artist Name
Settings
Copyright Name
Movie ZnMode
Movie R
Movie Effect13‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬99‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬Exp/p/ISO V c
EV Step
Noise Reduct.
Noise Filter
ISO
ISO Step‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬c

AR 150

v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬Off
Built-In R
External R
Line-In R
On



100

±0
±0
±0






100












‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬Style 3
،Level Gauge ،uBasic Information
Off
On
On



On



—








101



±0



Off
±0
PBH Battery—
On
On
Normal

NormalWind Noise Reduction‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬c

Recording Volume
R Volume Limiter
Built-In EVF b
Built-in EVF Style
V Info Settings
V Displayed Grid
EVF Auto Switch
EVF Auto
EVF Adjust
Luminance
V Half Way Level
K Utility k
Pixel Mappingp
ExposureJ
Shift
5.AF Focus Adj: Warning Level: Battery Priority
Level Adjust
Touch Screen Settings
Eye-FiStill Picture Electronic
Zoom
Movie
Speed

# Accessory Port Menu

13

v

3*

2*

‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬113 ،114‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬30 sec——Size 1: Small



—
—
—
—
Size 2: Medium

k ±0 ،j ±0
On

115

115

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬OLYMPUS PENPAL Share A #Please Wait
Address List
Address
Search TimerBook
New Pairing
My OLYMPUS PENPAL‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬

—
—

114

151 AR

1*

Picture Send Size
OLYMPUS PENPAL Album B
Copy All
Reset Protect
Album Mem. UsageAlbum Mem. Setup
Picture Copy Size
Electronic Viewfinder C
EVF Adjust
EVF Auto Switch‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬‫ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪13‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫‪AR 152‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ Micro Four Thirds Standard‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬‫‪ ،M.Zuiko Digital‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺿﻌﻑ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ "‪Live MOS 4/3‬‬‫‪ 16,850,000‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 16,280,000‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 17.3‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 13.0‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬‫‪(4:3) 1.33‬‬‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ‬‫‪ 2,360,000‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬‫‪100%‬‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 21.0‬ﻣﻡ )‪ –1‬ﻡ‪(-1‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ‪Live MOS‬‬‫‪100%‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ‪ LCD ،‬ﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ‪ TFT‬ﻗﻳﺎﺱ "‪ 3.0‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬‫‪1,040,000‬ﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪(3:2‬‬‫ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﺑﺭﻣﺞ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫‪ 60 - 1/8000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺿﻭﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪ 81‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪) TTL‬ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪/‬ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻱ‪/‬ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬‫‪) 20 - –2 EV‬ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪(ISO100 ،M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8‬‬‫‪ :P/iAUTO :A‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪/‬‬‫‪ :A‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪/‬‬‫‪ :S‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ :M/‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪/‬‬‫‪ :J‬ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪ :ART/‬ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪ :SCN/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ :n/‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 1 ،1/3) 25600 – 200 ،LOW‬ﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪(EV‬‬‫‪ 1 ،1/2 ،1/3) ±5 EV‬ﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪(EV‬‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )‪ 7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪/‬ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )‪(T‬‬‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ 12 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ 2/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ‪ 1 :‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ 4 :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬‫)ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪(.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬‫‪IEEE 802.11b/g/n‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ )ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪/(AV‬ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪/(D‬ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ‪/‬ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪/‬ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ × ‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬‫‪ 130.4‬ﻡ )ﻋﺭﺽ( × ‪ 93.5‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 63.1‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﻣﻕ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫)ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 497‬ﺟﻡ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬‫ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪ –10‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ –20 /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 60 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬‫‪) 90% - 30%‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪) 90% - 10%/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‬‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺵ‬‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪) IEC 529 IPX1‬ﺗﺣﺕ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪(OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ‬‫‪13‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻛ ٌﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪High-Definition‬‬‫‪ Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SDXC ،SDHC ،SD‬ﻭ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪UHS-I‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪) JPEG ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ )‪ ،((DCF‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪،RAW‬‬‫ﺻﻳﻐﺔ ‪MP‬‬‫‪ ،Exif 2.3‬ﻭﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ )‪ ،(DPOF‬ﻭ‪ ،PRINT Image Matching III‬ﻭ‬‫‪PictBridge‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪Wave‬‬‫‪MPEG-4 AVC/H.264/Motion JPEG‬‬‫ﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‪ 48 PCM ،‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭﻫﺭﺗﺯ‬‫‪) TTL-AUTO‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺑﻕ ‪MANUAL/(TTL‬‬‫‪ 1/320‬ﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ )‪(FL-LM2‬‬‫‪153 AR‬‬‫‪FL-LM2 ‬‬‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬‫)‪10 (ISO200) ،7 (ISO100‬‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ‬‫ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ 14‬ﻣﻡ )‪ 28‬ﻣﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻡ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 44.3‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﺭﺽ( × ‪ 33.5‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 52.5‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﻣﻕ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 31‬ﺟﺭﺍﻣًﺎ‬‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺵ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪) IEC 529 IPX1‬ﺗﺣﺕ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪(OLYMPUS‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬‫‪BLN-1‬‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻲ‬‫‪ 7.6‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻳﺔ‬‫‪ 1220‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‬‫‪ 500‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 36.0‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﺭﺽ( × ‪ 15.4‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 50.2‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﻣﻕ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 52‬ﺟﻡ‬‫‪ ‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬‫‪BCN-1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‬‫‪ 100‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ‪ 240 -‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ 50/60‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‬‫‪ 8.7‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‪ 600 ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‬‫‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ(‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪/‬‬‫‪ –20‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 60 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ(‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 67‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﺭﺽ( × ‪ 26‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 95.5‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﻣﻕ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ(‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 77‬ﺟﻡ‬‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻻ‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪AR 154‬‬‫ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺯﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬‫ﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺗﺢ‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻅﻬﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺗﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻅﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻫﻠﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻬﻙ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﺛﻠﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺛﺎﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻁﺭ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﻁﻔﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺩﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ!‬‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﺑﺩﺍ ﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫‪14‬‬‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺭﺏ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪ LED‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ )ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ( ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻳﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﻠﺭﺅﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ — ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺛﺎﺋﻕ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻼً‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ — ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺻﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﻅﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺫﺍﺫ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺿﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ — ﻷﻣﺎﻧﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ — ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺍﻷﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ — ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻡ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ — ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ — ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺳﻡ‬‫ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ — ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ‬‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺷﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﻗﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻛﺑﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬‫‪155 AR‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻻﺷﺗﺑﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻧﺎﻕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺑﺗﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬‫ﻋﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺻﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺻﺩ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻋﻳﻧﻳﻬﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻳﻧﻲ ﻁﻔﻝ‬‫ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺻﺩ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺿﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻁﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻁﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪AR 156‬‬‫•‬‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻅﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ‬‫ﺭﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺟﻳﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻭﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺩﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺭﺩﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻳﺩﻳﻙ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺩﻳﻥ ﻣﺑﻠﻠﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﻔﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ )ﺑﺩﺛﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺟﻡ ﻋﻧﻪ‬‫ﺍﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ‬‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬‫• ﺳﺗﺳﺧﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺳﻛﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺻﺎﺏ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ‬‫ﺗﻘﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺭﺗ ِﺩ ﻗﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺷﺗﺑﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ – ﻭﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻠ ًﻔﺎ ﺣﺎﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺧﻁﺭ‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ .‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ‬‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ‬‫ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻭﻫﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺩﺑﺎﺑﻳﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺑﺯﻳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻙ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺣﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻏﺳﻠﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻣﺎء ٍ‬‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺑﺗﻠﻊ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺻﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺻﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻧﺑﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ‬‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺻﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺷﻘﻭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻛﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺩﺃﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻩ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﺭﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻼً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺩﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺑﺱ ﻭﺍﻏﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻣﺎء ٍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺭﻕ ﺟﻠﺩﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬‫ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﺑﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺗﻥ ﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻌﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻵﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫‪14‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ً‬‫ﺑﺣﺛﺎ‬‫ﻋﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء‬‫ﺁﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺧﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ‬‫‪ .Olympus‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻵﻣﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﺕ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻠﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‬‫ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻳﺩًﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺗﻳﻥ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻔﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺗﺭ‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ‬‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬‫ﻛﻭﻛﺑﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ‬‫ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺭﻙ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‬‫ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﻁﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )ﻣﻭﻗﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻁﻳﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻔﺟﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﺎﻣﻳﻡ ﻣﺿﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻡ ﺟﻳﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻳﻧﻔﺫ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻛﺎ ًﻧﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩًﺍ ﻭﺟﺎ ًﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻔﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬‫ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ‪/‬ﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺩ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‬‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻭﺟﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬‫ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻛﺑﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺭﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬‬‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺭﺍﺝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺯﺍﻡ ﺑﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺳﺣﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪157 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺇﻧﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺧﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻫﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﻁﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻧﺎﺩﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻣﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺳﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﻣﺳﺕ ﻳﺩﻳﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩﻣﻳﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻟﻳﺱ ﻋﻁﻼً‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‬‫ﻣﺗﻌﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻟﻳﺱ ﻋﻁﻼً؛ ﻭﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻧﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﻔﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻵﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻓﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﺭﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺻﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬‫ﺑﻘﻊ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺻﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁ ﻣﺗﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻟﻳﺱ ﻋﻁﻼً‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬‫ﺃﻡ ﺿﻣﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﻣﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﻻ‬‫ﻳﻘﺗﺻﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ( ﺗﻧﺟﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ‬‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻏﻣﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺷﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪AR 158‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺔ‬‫ﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﺳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻌﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻙ‬‫ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻛﻲ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء‬‫ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ‬‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﻣﻥ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺣﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ‬‫ﻭﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻭﺻﻳﻙ ﺑﺷﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻼء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "CE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ‬‫ﻭﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬‫"‪ "CE‬ﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺭ ‪Olympus‬‬‫‪.Imaging Corp‬ﻭ ‪Olympus Europa‬‬‫‪ SE & Co.KG‬ﺑﺄﻥ ‪ E-M1‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‬‫ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ‪.EC/1999/5‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬‫‪/http://www.olympus-europa.com‬‬‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]ﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺟﻝ ﻣﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺧﻁﺎﻥ ﻣﺗﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ [4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺗﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]ﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺟﻝ ﻣﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺧﻁﺎﻥ ﻣﺗﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ‬‫‪ EC/2006/66‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ [2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫ﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺗﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﻳﻥ‬‫ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻣﻌﻳﺏ‪،‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ )ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻌﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻁﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪OLYMPUS EUROPA SE & Co.‬‬‫‪ KG‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪:‬‬‫‪ ،http://www.olympus-europa.com‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪،‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﻧﺎءًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻛﻣﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺭﺿﻳﻙ ﻭﺑﺄﺳﺭﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﻣﻁﺎﻟﺑﺔ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪http://consumer-service.olympus-europa.com‬‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ )ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺳﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬‫ﻭﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﻣﻧﻪ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪OLYMPUS EUROPA SE & Co.‬‬‫‪ KG‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪:‬‬‫‪ ،http://www.olympus-europa.com‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻁﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﻣﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻛﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻭ ﺳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﻬﺭ‬‫ﻭﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺳﻳﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻌﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻛﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ(‬‫ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ‪ Olympus‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻛﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﻻ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬‫)ﺃ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺳﻭء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﺫﻛﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ(‬‫)ﺏ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫)ﺟـ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻘﻭﻁ‪ ،‬ﺻﺩﻣﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺦ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺷﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫)ﺩ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺯﻟﺯﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺿﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺎﻋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻛﻭﺍﺭﺙ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻭﺙ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫)ﻫـ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻹﻫﻣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺣﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺛﺎﻟﻳﻥ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﻗﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫)ﻭ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫)ﺯ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪159 AR‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﻳﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﻣﻘﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﺛﻧﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬‫ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻌﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻛﺑﺩﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺧﻠﻝ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺭﺭ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ‬‫ﻷﻱ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ‬‫ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﺯﺍﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺄﺛﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺗﺎﻥ‬‫ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻫﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬‫‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi, Inc.‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ "ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻧﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟّ ﻠﺔ ﺑﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ‪Apical‬‬‫‪.Limited‬‬‫‪،Four Thirds ،Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﻭ ‪Four‬‬‫‪ Thirds‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬‫‪ OLYMPUS IMAGING Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ "‪ "PENPAL‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬‫‪.PENPAL‬‬‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺎﻟﻑ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪Wi-Fi CERTIFIED‬‬‫ﻫﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﻕ ﻟﺗﺣﺎﻟﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪.Alliance‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ‬‫"ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪ "DCF/‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﺹ‬‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫)‪.(JEITA‬‬‫• ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺧﺹ ﻣﺎﻟﻛﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪AR 160‬‬‫‪THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE‬‬‫‪AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE‬‬‫‪PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE‬‬‫‪OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN‬‬‫‪COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC‬‬‫‪VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT‬‬‫‪WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED‬‬‫‪IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL‬‬‫‪ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A‬‬‫‪VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE‬‬‫‪AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR‬‬‫‪SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.‬‬‫‪ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED‬‬‫‪FROM MPEG LA، L.L.C. SEE‬‬‫‪HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ‬‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬‫ﻳﻔﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺣﺎﺏ ﺭﺧﺻﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻡ‬‫ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻟﻳﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ‬‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﻣﻠﻑ ‪ PDF‬ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪http://www.olympus.co.jp/en/support/imsg/‬‬‫‪digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ(‬‫‪28‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺣﻲ‬‫‪41‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﻳﺩ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﻧﻲ(‬‫‪43‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([M Old Film‬‬‫‪43‬‬‫ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﻧﻲ )ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪ [G Vintage‬ﻭ]‪([H Partial Color‬‬‫‪44‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([J Panning‬‬‫ﻗﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪ [C Zoom In/Out‬ﻭ]‪ [D Layout‬ﻭ]‪[Q Works in progress‬‬‫)ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ‪/‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ((‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ )ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺯﻭﻡ ‪ 3‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ(‬‫‪46‬‬‫‪48‬‬‫‪56‬‬‫‪57‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪ [Every Frame AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪([YC Custom Self-timer‬‬‫ﻣﻧﺷﺊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪(MENU‬‬‫‪60‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ‪) HDR‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟـ ]‪ [HDR1‬ﻭ]‪([HDR2‬‬‫‪60‬‬‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ‬‫‪86‬‬‫]‪[z Lock‬‬‫]‪[USB Mode‬‬‫‪96‬‬‫‪96‬‬‫]‪[RVolume Limiter‬‬‫‪100‬‬‫]‪[Electronic Zoom Speed‬‬‫‪101‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪3.0‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫]‪ 9) [T Sequential H‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪(C-AF‬‬‫‪163‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪4.0‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪163‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‬‫‪164‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([[ Underwater‬‬‫‪164‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫‪165‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻣﺕ )]♥[‪(Anti-Shockz/Silent‬‬‫‪166‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ]‪([j/Y‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺳﻳﻥ )ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([Focus BKT‬‬‫‪167‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪2.0‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪168‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺣﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫‪169‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء )ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([Movie Settings‬‬‫‪169‬‬‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ‬‫‪169‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ‪IC‬‬‫‪170‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﻭﺓ )ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ(‬‫‪170‬‬‫‪R AF/MF‬‬‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪[MF Clutch‬‬‫‪170‬‬‫‪161 AR‬‬171

T Release/j[Image Stabilizer]‫♥[ ﻭ‬j H fps]‫♥[ ﻭ‬j L fps] ‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬171

U Disp/8/PC[Expand LV Dyn. Range]‫[ ﻭ‬Live View Boost]‫[ ﻭ‬G/Info Settings] ‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬[Peaking Settings]‫ﻭ‬[Menu Recall] ‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬172

V Exp/p/ISO[Anti-Shock z] ‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬172

Z Movie‫[ ﻭ‬Time Code Settings]‫[ ﻭ‬PCM Recorder K Link] ‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬[nShutter Function]‫[ ﻭ‬n Info Settings]

173
173

b Built-In EVF[V Info Settings] ‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬[S-OVF] ‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬173(2.6 ‫ )ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬OI.Share

173(1.1 ‫ )ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬OLYMPUS Capture

174‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬/‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬15

AR 162‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪3.0‬‬‫]‪ 9) [T Sequential H‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪(C-AF‬‬‫ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻘﺏ ﻓﻲ ‪ AF) C-AF‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ(‪ 9 ،‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ H‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ )‪ (T‬ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.C-AF‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪4.0‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ ﻭ‪ S-OVF‬ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ .................................. S-OVF n 1‬ﺹ‪173 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺿﺎﺩ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪/z‬ﺻﺎﻣﺕ]♥[ ‪ ................‬ﺹ‪166 .‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪R‬‬

‫‪TC 00:00:00:00 DF‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪15‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ ...................‬ﺹ‪100 ،76 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ......................................... .‬ﺹ‪42 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪172 .‬‬‫‪163 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪ (68 .‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫‪Movie-I.S.‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪M-IS1‬‬‫‪All Direction‬‬‫‪Shake I.S.‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻼً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ )‪ (VCM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪M-IS2‬‬‫‪All Direction‬‬‫‪Shake I.S.‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ )‪ (VCM‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪.(T‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([[Underwater‬‬‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪ [[Underwater‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪.(70 .‬‬‫[ ‪Underwater‬‬‫ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪AR 164‬‬‫• ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪ [#+WB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫]‪) [[Underwater‬ﺹ‪.(98 .‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪ (X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Off‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪.(72.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪Settings INFO‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪MOV 1920×1080 Fine‬‬‫‪00:00:00‬‬‫‪FHD N HD F HD N‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬‫‪MOVnFHD F 30p‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪1‬‬‫‪MOVnFHD N 30p‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪2‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫‪MOVnHD F 30p‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪3‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫‪MOVnHD N 30p‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪4‬‬‫)‪*(Full HD Fine 30p‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫)‪*(Full HD Normal 30p‬‬‫)‪*(HD Fine 30p‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫)‪*(HD Normal 30p‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫)‪*(1280×720, Motion JPEG‬‬‫‪SD‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫)‪*(640×480, Motion JPEG‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬‫―‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬‫―‬‫*‪ 1‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ MPEG-4 AVC/H.264. :‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 29‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،PAL‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﺍﺯ ‪ 30p‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ‪.25p‬‬‫• ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪165 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻣﺕ )]♥[‪(Anti-Shockz/Silent‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )‪(Anti-Shockz‬‬‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻬﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]]♥[‪ [Anti-Shockz/Silent‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Anti-Shockz‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Keystone Comp.‬‬‫]‪Anti-Shock [i]/Silent [j‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪AR 166‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ‪) j/Y‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ‪ LV‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ♦ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.Q‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻘﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ‪ 1/320 s‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Single‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )]♥[ ‪(Silent‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﺻﺎﺭﻉ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺳﺎﺋﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]]♥[ ‪ [Anti-Shockz/Silent‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪2‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]]♥[‪ [Silent‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Keystone Comp.‬‬‫]‪Anti-Shock [i]/Silent [j‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ♥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.Q‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 1/8 s‬ﻭ‪ .1/16000 s‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ISO LOW‬ﻭ‪.3200‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ ﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭ ًﻛﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻭﺳﻧﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ]‪([j/Y‬‬‫]‪) [j/Y‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ( ﻓﻲ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ W‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪.1‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪ ،[j/Y‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [j/Y/i‬ﻓﻲ ‪ W‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [j/Y‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) I‬ﺹ‪.(81 .‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ‪) j/Y‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ‪ LV‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Single‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪167 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺳﻳﻥ )ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([Focus BKT‬‬‫]‪) [Focus BKT‬ﺗﻘﻭﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ( ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﺱ )ﺹ‪.(82 .‬‬‫‪Focus BKT‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺄﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫]‪ ،[Set number of shots‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫]‪ ،[Set focus differential‬ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫]‪ .[# Charge Time‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪[Set focus differential‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻟﺗﻭﺳﻳﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺣﺭﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/13‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﺛﻼﺙ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫‪AR 168‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set number of shots‬‬‫‪0 0 3‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Focus BKT‬‬‫‪Wide‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Focus BKT‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Focus Stacking‬‬‫‪Set number of shots‬‬‫‪Set focus differential‬‬‫‪#Charge Time‬‬‫‪Narrow‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪#Charge Time‬‬‫‪30sec‬‬‫‪Select time between shutter‬‬‫‪release for flash recharge.‬‬‫‪This setting is not necessary‬‬‫‪when using an Olympus flash.‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺣﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻣﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﻔﻳﻑ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Focus BKT‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Focus Stacking‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫‪Focus BKT‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪99‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪0sec‬‬

‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Focus Stacking‬‬‫‪Set number of shots‬‬‫‪Set focus differential‬‬‫‪#Charge Time‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻣﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﻔﻳﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬‫ﺑﺅﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺷﻠﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺿﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ]‪ ،[Focus Stacking‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻣﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء )ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([Movie Settings‬‬‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪ [Movie Settings‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء )ﺹ‪.(85 .‬‬‫‪Movie Settings‬‬‫]‪ :[Movie Resolution‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻣًﺎ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Frame Rate‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﺍﺯ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫]‪ [Time Lapse Settings‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻠﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ W‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪.1‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [j/Y/i‬ﻓﻲ ‪ W‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬‫]‪ [Time Lapse Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Bracketing‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺧﺭﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻊ ]‪ [4K‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪.[Movie Settings] > [Movie Resolution‬‬‫• ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻣﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ]‪ [4K‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ‬‫]‪ [Keystone Comp.‬ﻓﻲ ‪ W‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ X‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪) 2‬ﺹ‪.(86 .‬‬‫‪169 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ‪IC‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ‪.IC‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ‪ IC‬ﺑﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪ [Camera Rec. Volume‬ﺿﻣﻥ ]‪ [PCM Recorder K Link‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬‫‪ (Z‬ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ )ﺹ‪.(172 .‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫)‪MENU‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ‪ OLYMPUS IC‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪LS-100‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ‪ OLYMPUS IC‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪ LS-100‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺩء‪/‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪ [Slate Tone‬ﻭ]‪ [Synchronized ]Rec.‬ﺿﻣﻥ ]‪ [PCM Recorder K Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [On‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪ (Z‬ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ )ﺹ‪.(172 .‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪ LS-100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪AR 170‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪ LS-100‬ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪ LS-100‬ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ ،USB‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻁﺎﻟﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ .[PCM Recorder‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (96 .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ‪ LS-100‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳُﻧﻬﻲ ‪ LS-100‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺛﺎﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ LS-100‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﻭﺓ )ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[MF Assist‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﻓﻲ )ﺹ‪ .(102 .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ‬‫‪) (U‬ﺹ‪.(171 .‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫]‪ [Peaking Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪R AF/MF‬‬‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪) (R‬ﺹ‪.(93 .‬‬‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪[MF Clutch‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪MF Clutch‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Inoperative‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪130‬‬

‫‪T Release/j‬‬‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪) (T‬ﺹ‪.(94 .‬‬‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪ [♥j L fps‬ﻭ]‪ [♥j H fps‬ﻭ]‪[Image Stabilizer‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪♥j L fps‬‬‫‪♥j H fps‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪،57‬‬‫‪167‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪.2‬‬‫―‬‫‪U Disp/8/PC‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪) (U‬ﺹ‪.(95 .‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ]‪ [G/Info Settings‬ﻭ]‪ [Live View Boost‬ﻭ]‪[Expand LV Dyn. Range‬‬‫ﻭ]‪[Peaking Settings‬‬‫‪Live View Boost‬‬‫‪Expand LV Dyn.‬‬‫‪Range‬‬‫‪Peaking Settings‬‬‫‪173‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬‫―‬‫‪109‬‬‫―‬‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪[Menu Recall‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪Menu Recall‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪ [Recall‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪v‬‬
‫―‬

‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪G/Info Settings‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫]‪ :[q Info‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[LV-Info‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫]‪ [Custom1‬ﻭ]‪.[Custom2‬‬‫]‪ :[G Settings‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ bulb/time‬ﺃﻭ‬‫‪.live composite‬‬‫]‪ :[On1‬ﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On2‬ﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺳﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ‪.‬‬‫]‪ [Expand LV Dyn. Range‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-OVF‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪171 AR‬‬‫‪V Exp/p/ISO‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪) (V‬ﺹ‪.(96 .‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ]‪[Anti-Shock z‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪Anti-Shock z‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]‪ [Anti-Shock z‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Anti-Shockz‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪.2‬‬‫‪166‬‬‫‪Z Movie‬‬‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪) (Z‬ﺹ‪.(100 .‬‬‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪ [PCM Recorder K Link‬ﻭ]‪ [Time Code Settings‬ﻭ]‪[n Info Settings‬‬‫ﻭ]‪[nShutter Function‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫‪PCM Recorder K‬‬‫‪Link‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪AR 172‬‬‫‪Time Code‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫‪n Info Settings‬‬‫‪nShutter‬‬‫‪Function‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫]‪ :[Camera Rec. Volume‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Inoperative‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ‪ IC‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Slate Tone‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Synchronized ]Rec.‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ‪/‬ﻳﻧﻬﻲ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ‪ IC‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﺩﺃ‪/‬ﺗﻧﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Time Code Mode‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪) [Drop Frame‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﺳﺩﻝ( ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣُﺻﺣﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﺧﻁﺎء ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭ ]‪) [Non-DF‬ﺑﻼ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬‫ﻣﻧﺳﺩﻝ( ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣُﺻﺣﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Count Up‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪ [Rec Run‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭ]‪ [Free Run‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪،‬‬‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Starting Time‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬‫]‪ [Current Time‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .00‬ﻟﻠﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪ ،00:00:00:00‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ .[Reset‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫]‪.[Manual Input‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪ Motion JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪.I‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﺑﺩء ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪ ،mode2‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.R‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪170‬‬

‫―‬

‫―‬
‫―‬

‫‪b Built-In EVF‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪) (b‬ﺹ‪.(100 .‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ]‪[V Info Settings‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪V Info Settings‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻅﻠﻳﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪[Custom1‬‬‫ﻭ]‪ .[Custom2‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [Style 1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Style 2‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ‬‫]‪.[Built-in EVF Style‬‬

‫‪v‬‬
‫―‬

‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪[S-OVF‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ n‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ]‪.[S-OVF‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫―‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪) D‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ(‬‫‪S-OVF‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫]‪) ([Button Function‬ﺹ‪.(103 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻳﻣﺎﺛﻝ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ n‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ]‪.[S-OVF‬‬‫• )‪ n (S-OVF‬ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻪ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[Multi Function‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪ [S-OVF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ )‪ iAuto (A‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﻧﻲ )‪ (ART‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )‪ (SCN‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻗﺻﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )‪.(n‬‬‫‪) OI.Share‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪(2.6‬‬‫‪ OI.Share‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 2.6‬ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪) OLYMPUS Capture‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪(1.1‬‬‫‪ OLYMPUS Capture‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 1.1‬ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.OLYMPUS Capture‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪S-OVF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻳﻣﺎﺛﻝ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [S-OVF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪173 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬.‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬.[Myset] ‫ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬:1*.[Reset] ‫[ ﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬Full] ‫ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬:2*.[Reset] ‫[ ﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬Basic] ‫ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬:3*‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬K

v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬

165







MOVnFHDF30p
Off

169
168
169
168
168
168
169



























2*

1*

10fps
Off
Off
99
5
0 sec
Off
On (0 sec)
On (0 sec)

Time Lapse Settings
Movie
Movie
Resolution
Settings
Frame Rate
Focus BKT
Focus Stacking
Set number of shots
Set focus differential‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
W

K
j/Y/i

X
Bracketing#Charge Time
Keystone Comp.
Anti-Shockz Anti-Shockz/
Silent[♥]Silent[♥]‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬cv

3*‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬AF/MF RMF Clutch

170







Operative

171







5fps

♥j L fps







11fps

164







M-IS1

♥j H fps
Image Stabilizer

Release/j T

Movie

Disp/8/PC


109







171

171







Image Only,
Overall
Image Only,
Custom1 (u), Custom2 (Level
Gauge)O,
Calendar
On1



LV-Info15

Manual Shooting
Bulb/Time

OffLive Composite

Off

OthersWhite

Peaking Color

Standard

Highlight Intensity
Image Brightness
Adj.

RecallG/Info Settings

G Settings

On2

On
171

q InfoUc‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬/‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬166

FullHD‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬Movie

Live View Boost

Peaking Settings
Menu Recall

AR 174

v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬Movie

Operative
172



Off



Drop Frame
Rec Run
―

Off
172



172



All Onn Info Settings

172



mode1

nShutter Function
Built-In EVF

173

173

‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬/‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬15

175 AR







Basic
Information,
 Custom1 (u),Custom2 (Level
Gauge)OffZ

Camera Rec.
VolumePCM Recorder K
Slate Tone
Link
Synchronized ]Rec.
Time Code Mode
Count Up Time Code Settings
Starting Time

V Info Settings
S-OVF

b

c

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬96 ................................................... 0
96 ................................................ z LockA
39 ......................... (‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬A
114 .................................... Address Book
102 ,93 ...................................... AEL/AFL
97 .......................................AEL Metering
93 ..........................................AF Illuminat
93 ,75 ........................................ AF Mode
115 ........................... Album Mem. Usage
98 ............................................... All >97 ..................................... Anti-Shock z
43 ...............................................Art Fade
95 .........................................Art LV Mode
44 ..........................(‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬ART

B
96 ..........................................Backlit LCD
82 ............................................Bracketing
41 ................................................... BULB
97 ,93 .................... BULB/TIME Focusing
97 ................................BULB/TIME Timer
94 ................................... Button Function

C
78 .......................................... Card Setup
98 .........................................Color Space
97 ............................. Composite Settings
90 ..................Connection to Smartphone
115 ............................................. Copy All
99 ............................... Copyright SettingsD
94 ....................................... Dial Direction
94 ........................................Dial Function
104 ,86 ...................Digital Tele-converter
95 ..................................... Displayed Grid
99 ..........................................dpi Settings‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‬91 ......................................(‫ )ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬W
91 .............................c/# Menu Display
54 ......................................(AF Area) P
93 .....................................P Set Home93 ,55 ............................. I Face Priority
167 ,81 .......................................... j/Y
94 .......................j Image Stabilization
94 ............................................. j H fps
94 .............................................. j L fps
171 ......................................... ♥j H fps
171 .......................................... ♥j L fps
171 ,95 .......................... G/Info Settings
173 ,100 .........................V Info Settings
95 .............................K Control Settings
97 ........................................# Slow Limit
97 ........................................... .# X-Sync
135 .......................................# RC Mode98 ................................................ # WB+
97 ................................................. w+F
101 ........................... : Warning Level
103 .....(‫ﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬/‫ )ﺗﺑﻌﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬I/H
63 ...................................(‫ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬G
63 ...........................(‫ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ‬U
42 ...................................... (‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬n
100 ............................................ n Mode
172 ................................. n Info Settings
172 ............................. nShutter Function
33 ..................................(‫ )ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬D
33 .................................... (‫ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬v
66 ,32 .....................................(‫ )ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬098 ......................... W Keep Warm Color
88 ................................... (‫ )ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬R
98 ................................................ K Set
96 ......................................(‫ )ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺔ‬8
66 ..................................... (‫ )ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬R
100 .............................. R Volume Limiter
91 .............................(‫ )ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬i
67 .................................. (‫ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬m
94 ..............................t Lever Function

AR 176

L

E

94 .................................. Lens I.S. Priority
101 ....................................... Level Adjust
97 ............................................Live BULB
97 ............................................ Live TIME
41 ........................................... LIVE TIME
171 ,95 ........................... Live View Boost

99 .......................................Edit Filename
101 ..................... Electronic Zoom Speed
115 .........................................EVF Adjust
96 ............................................... EV Step
101 ................................... Exposure Shift101 ................................................ Eye-FiMF

41 ....................................(‫ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬M
171 .......................................Menu Recall
103 ..................................................... MF
102 ,93 ..................................... MF Assist
170 .......................................... MF Clutch
94 ..............................Mode Dial Function
95 ......................................... Mode Guide
100 ,76 ....................................... Movie R
43 ........................... Movie Tele-converter
122 ................................................... MTP
43 ............................................Multi Echo
104 ,23 .............................. Multi Function
114 .................... My OLYMPUS PENPAL

99 ............................................ File Name
91 ..............................................Firmware
96 .................................. Flicker reduction
168 .........................................Focus BKT
93 .......................................... Focus Ring
169 .................................. Focus Stacking
93 ......................................... Full-time AF

N
97 .......................................... Noise Filter
96 ...................................... .Noise ReductO
43 ............................................... Old Film
173 ............................................ OI.Share
173 ........................... OLYMPUS Capture
115 ............... OLYMPUS PENPAL Album
114 ,113 ........OLYMPUS PENPAL Share
43 .................................... One Shot EchoH
94 ........................... Half Way Rls With IS
95 ................................................... HDMI
60 .....................................................HDR
51 ...................Highlight&Shadow Control
95 .............................. Histogram SettingsI
26 ,22 ,18 .....................(iAuto ‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ‬A
71 .......................................Image Aspect
171 ,68 ...........................Image Stabilizer
97 ,59 ................................................ ISO
97 ..............................................ISO-Auto
97 ....................................... ISO-Auto Set
97 .............................................. ISO Step

J
89 ............................................ JPEG EditK
169 ,86 .......................... .Keystone Comp177 AR

U

P

96 ........................................... USB mode

38 ...................................(‫ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺭﻣﺞ‬P
171 ,96 ..........................Peaking Settings
115 .............................. Picture Copy Size
80 ,70 ................................. Picture Mode95 ......................... Picture Mode Settings
98 .......................................... Pixel Count145 .................................... Pixel Mapping
117 ................................................... Print
99 ........................................... Priority Set
172 ....................... PCM Recorder K Link

V
95 .............................................Video OutW
98 ,58 .................................................WB
92 ...................................... Wi-Fi Settings‫ﺍ‬71 ..............................................‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬30 ............................................ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬73 ..............................w ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬122 ..................................................‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬66 .....................................................‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬41 ................................ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬166 ............................. ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‬84 ......................... a ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬28 ............................................. ‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬62 ,51 ,37 .................................INFO ‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬74 ..................................................... ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬165 ,72 .......................... (‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﺕ‬90 ............................................ ‫ﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬167 ..........................................‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻣﺕ‬65 ............................................... ‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬169 ....................................‫ﺗﻭﺣﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺡ‬116 ..................................... > ‫ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬Q
99 ......................................... Quick EraseR
88 .................................... RAW Data Edit
99 .............................. RAW+JPEG Erase
100 ............................. Recording Volume
91 ............................................. Rec View
94 ............................... Release Lag-Time
93 .......................................... Reset Lens
79 .........................................Reset/Myset
115 ,90 ...............................Reset Protect
94 ........................................Rls Priority C
94 ........................................Rls Priority S

S
40 ...................(‫ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬S
98 .....................................Shading Comp
96 ,16 ............................................. Sleep
173 ................................................S-OVF‫ﺽ‬T

17 ................................. X ‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬/‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬172 ........................... Time Code Settings
169 ,85 ....................Time Lapse Settings
101 .......................Touch Screen Settings‫ﻝ‬
24 ........................................‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬107 ....................‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﻡ‬33 .............................................. ‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬AR 178‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪2015.09.‬‬‫‪WC658502‬‬